Cabletron Systems Network Router CSX400 User Manual
CSX400 AND CSX400-DC  
USER’S GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice  
Cabletron Systems reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior  
notice. The reader should in all cases consult Cabletron Systems to determine whether any such changes have been made.  
The hardware, firmware, or software described in this manual is subject to change without notice.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL CABLETRON SYSTEMS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS) ARISING OUT OF OR  
RELATED TO THIS MANUAL OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT, EVEN IF CABLETRON SYSTEMS HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF, KNOWN, OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN, THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
Copyright 1997 by Cabletron Systems, Inc., P.O. Box 5005, Rochester, NH 03866-5005  
All Rights Reserved  
Printed in the United States of America  
Part Number: 9032289 September 1997  
Cabletron Systems LANVIEW, QuickSET, and SPECTRUM are registered trademarks, and QuickSTART, and CSX400 and  
CSX400-DC are trademarks of Cabletron Systems, Inc.  
All other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.  
FCC Notice  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a  
commercial environment. This equipment uses, generates, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed in accordance  
with the operator’s manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area  
is likely to cause interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
WARNING: Changes or modifications made to this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance  
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
DOC Notice  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio  
Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.  
Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la  
class A prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice  
VCCI Notice  
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology  
Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the  
user may be required to take corrective actions.  
Cabletron Systems, Inc. Program License Agreement  
IMPORTANT: Before utilizing this product, carefully read this License Agreement.  
This document is an agreement between you, the end user, and Cabletron Systems, Inc. (“Cabletron”) that sets forth your rights and  
obligations with respect to the Cabletron software program (the “Program”) contained in this package. The Program may be contained  
in firmware, chips or other media. BY UTILIZING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT,YOU ARE AGREEING TO BECOME BOUND BY  
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHICH INCLUDES THE LICENSE AND THE LIMITATION OF WARRANTY AND  
DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE  
UNUSED PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND.  
Cabletron Software Program License  
1.  
LICENSE. You have the right to use only the one (1) copy of the Program provided in this package subject to the terms and  
conditions of this License Agreement.  
You may not copy, reproduce or transmit any part of the Program except as permitted by the Copyright Act of the United States or  
as authorized in writing by Cabletron.  
2.  
3.  
OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Program.  
APPLICABLE LAW. This License Agreement shall be interpreted and governed under the laws and in the state and federal courts  
of New Hampshire. You accept the personal jurisdiction and venue of the New Hampshire courts.  
ii CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice  
Exclusion of Warranty and Disclaimer of Liability  
1.  
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY. Except as may be specifically provided by Cabletron in writing, Cabletron makes no warranty,  
expressed or implied, concerning the Program (including its documentation and media).  
CABLETRON DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, OTHER THAN THOSE SUPPLIED TO YOU BY CABLETRON IN  
WRITING, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THE PROGRAM, THE  
ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS, AND ANY ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE.  
2.  
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL CABLETRON OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF  
BUSINESS, PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR RELIANCE DAMAGES, OR OTHER LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE  
THIS CABLETRON PRODUCT, EVEN IF CABLETRON HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR ON THE DURATION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, IN SOME INSTANCES THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
United States Government Restricted Rights  
The enclosed product (a) was developed solely at private expense; (b) contains “restricted computer software” submitted with restricted  
rights in accordance with Section 52227-19 (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights Clause and its  
successors, and (c) in all respects is proprietary data belonging to Cabletron and/or its suppliers.  
For Department of Defense units, the product is licensed with “Restricted Rights” as defined in the DoD Supplement to the Federal  
Acquisition Regulations, Section 52.227-7013 (c) (1) (ii) and its successors, and use, duplication, disclosure by the Government is  
subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at  
252.227-7013. Cabletron Systems, Inc., 35 Industrial Way, Rochester, New Hampshire 03867-0505.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
Application of Council Directive(s): 89/336/EEC  
73/23/EEC  
91/263/EEC  
Manufacturer’s Name: Cabletron Systems, Inc.  
Manufacturer’s Address: 35 Industrial Way  
PO Box 5005  
Rochester, NH 03867  
European Representative Name: Mr. J. Solari  
European Representative Address: Cabletron Systems Limited  
Nexus House, Newbury Business Park  
London Road, Newbury  
Berkshire RG13 2PZ, England  
Conformance to Directive(s)/Product Standards: EC Directive 89/336/EEC  
EC Directive 73/23/EEC  
EC Directive 91/263/EEC  
EN 55022  
EN 50082-1  
EN 60950  
Equipment Type/Environment: Networking Equipment, for use in a Commercial or Light Industrial  
Environment.  
We the undersigned, hereby declare, under our sole responsibility, that the equipment packaged with this notice conforms to the  
above directives.  
Manufacturer  
Legal Representative in Europe  
Mr. Ronald Fotino  
Mr. J. Solari  
___________________________________  
___________________________________  
Full Name  
Full Name  
Principal Compliance Engineer  
Managing Director - E.M.E.A.  
___________________________________  
___________________________________  
Title  
Title  
Rochester, NH, USA  
Newbury, Berkshire, England  
___________________________________  
___________________________________  
Location  
Location  
iv CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
CHAPTER 1  
CHAPTER 2  
INTRODUCTION  
Related Documentation ..................................................................................1  
How to Use This Guide...................................................................................1  
Document Conventions...................................................................................3  
Getting Help....................................................................................................4  
ABOUT THE CSX400  
CSX400 Hardware..........................................................................................5  
WAN Connection......................................................................................5  
Ethernet LAN Connection.........................................................................7  
Remote Management Capabilities..................................................................7  
Optional Features ...........................................................................................8  
CSX400 Firmware Support.............................................................................8  
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet.................................................................................8  
WAN Protocols .........................................................................................9  
Firmware Data Compression..................................................................10  
Inverse Multiplexing (IMUX) ...................................................................10  
HDLC......................................................................................................11  
DHCP and NAT ......................................................................................11  
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).................................................................12  
PAP and CHAP Security ........................................................................12  
LQM........................................................................................................13  
Multilink Protocol ....................................................................................13  
ISDN.......................................................................................................14  
ISDN Back-up.........................................................................................15  
HDSL......................................................................................................16  
Bridging and Routing..............................................................................16  
Bridging and Routing Protocol Filtering..................................................18  
System Passwords.................................................................................18  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) ....................................19  
Software and Firmware Upgrades..........................................................22  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
CHAPTER 3  
ISDN LINE ORDERING AND CONFIGURATION  
Arranging ISDN Service................................................................................23  
Telephone Switch Support............................................................................24  
ISDN BRI Line Configuration ........................................................................24  
ISDN BRI Configurations........................................................................25  
SPIDs, Directory Numbers and Telephone Numbers.............................25  
Telephone Switch Parameters......................................................................26  
CHAPTER 4  
PLANNING FOR CSX400 ISDN CONFIGURATION  
Configuration Process and Terminology.......................................................29  
Collect Network Information ...................................................................30  
Names and Passwords...........................................................................30  
ISDN Line Information ............................................................................31  
Network Information Diagrams...............................................................32  
Network Information Tables....................................................................38  
Sample Configuration....................................................................................42  
Names and Passwords Example ..................................................................47  
CHAPTER 5  
ETHERNET CABLING REQUIREMENTS  
Network Requirements..................................................................................49  
10BASE-T Twisted Pair Network............................................................50  
Multimode Fiber Optic Network ..............................................................51  
Single Mode Fiber Optic Network...........................................................52  
10BASE2 Coaxial Cable Network ..........................................................53  
Transceiver Requirements .....................................................................53  
CHAPTER 6  
INSTALLATION  
Unpacking the CSX400.................................................................................55  
Guidelines for Installations............................................................................55  
Installing Interface Modules ..........................................................................56  
Installing Ethernet Port Interface Modules (EPIMs)................................56  
Removing the CSX400 Cover ................................................................58  
Removing the CSX400-DC Cover..........................................................59  
Installing WAN Port Interface Modules (WPIMs)....................................60  
vi CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
CSX-COMP/ENCR Installation .....................................................................62  
Installing the CSX400....................................................................................63  
Tabletop and Shelf Installations .............................................................63  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC Rackmount Installation.................................64  
Connecting the CSX400 to the Power Source..............................................68  
Connecting the CSX400-DC to the Power Source........................................69  
CHAPTER 7  
CSX400 CONFIGURATION WITH QuickSET  
Ethernet Configuration ..................................................................................74  
Ethernet 1 and 2 Configuration Window.................................................74  
Wide Area 1 and 2 Configuration..................................................................79  
Wide Area T1 Configuration Window .....................................................80  
Wide Area E1 Configuration Window .....................................................83  
Wide Area DI Configuration Window......................................................85  
Wide Area Synchronous Configuration Window.....................................88  
Wide Area DDS Configuration Window..................................................91  
Wide Area HDSL Configuration Window................................................93  
Wide Area Frame Relay Time Slot Configuration Window.....................95  
Wide Area PPP Time Slot Configuration Window ..................................96  
Wide Area HDSL Time Slot Configuration Window................................98  
Bridging and Routing Configuration ..............................................................99  
Bridging and Routing Configuration Window..........................................99  
Bridging and Routing (WAN Frame Type) Configuration Window........105  
Routing Configuration Window.............................................................107  
IP Routing Configuration ......................................................................108  
IPX Routing Configuration....................................................................108  
Advanced Routing Configuration Window............................................111  
QuickSET Pull-Down Menus.......................................................................117  
File Menu..............................................................................................117  
Firmware Upgrade Menu......................................................................119  
Advanced Configuration Menu .............................................................122  
Compression and Congestion Window ................................................123  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
CHAPTER 8  
GENERAL CONFIGURATION USING LOCAL MANAGEMENT  
Chapter Organization..................................................................................125  
Local Management Overview......................................................................126  
Management Agent ..............................................................................126  
Local vs. Remote Management............................................................126  
Local Management Screen Elements...................................................127  
Local Management Keyboard Conventions..........................................129  
Navigating Within Local Management Screens....................................130  
Establishing a TELNET Connection .....................................................131  
Local Management Screen Hierarchy ..................................................131  
Accessing Local Management ....................................................................132  
Using the Menu Screens ......................................................................132  
Main Menu Screen ...............................................................................133  
Setup Menu Screen..............................................................................134  
System Level Screen ..................................................................................135  
Setting the System Date.......................................................................138  
Setting the System Time ......................................................................138  
Setting the Host IP Address .................................................................139  
Setting the Subnet Mask ......................................................................139  
Setting the Default Gateway.................................................................139  
Setting the Default Interface.................................................................140  
SNMP Community Names Screen..............................................................141  
Community Name Access Policy..........................................................141  
Setting SNMP Community Names .......................................................142  
SNMP Traps Screen ...................................................................................143  
Trap Table Screen Fields .....................................................................143  
Setting the SNMP Trap Destination......................................................144  
Flash Download Screen..............................................................................145  
Selecting a Flash Download Method....................................................146  
viii CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Bridge Setup Screen...................................................................................149  
Bridge Setup Screen Fields..................................................................149  
Selecting a Spanning Tree Protocol.....................................................150  
Selecting the Bridge Port Administrative Status...................................150  
Selecting the Bridge Port Pair Administrative Status............................151  
Router Setup Screen...................................................................................152  
Router Setup Fields..............................................................................152  
IP Configuration Screen..............................................................................153  
IP Configuration Screen Fields.............................................................153  
IP General Config Screen.....................................................................154  
IP General Configuration Status Fields ................................................154  
IP General Configuration Fields ...........................................................155  
Enabling the RIP Routing Protocol on a Port .......................................160  
IPX Configuration Screen............................................................................162  
IPX Configuration Fields.......................................................................162  
IPX General Configuration Screen .......................................................163  
IPX General Configuration Status Fields..............................................163  
IPX General Configuration Fields.........................................................164  
IPX Routing over Frame Relay.............................................................167  
Enabling the IPX SAP Routing Protocol on a Port ...............................168  
Enabling RIP on a Port.........................................................................170  
WAN Setup .................................................................................................172  
WAN Physical Configuration Screen Fields .........................................173  
WAN Interface Configuration Screen..........................................................174  
WAN Interface Configuration Screen Fields.........................................174  
CHAPTER 9  
MIB NAVIGATOR  
Chapter Organization..................................................................................177  
MIB Navigator Screen.................................................................................178  
Managing Device MIBs.........................................................................178  
MIB Navigator Command Set Overview .....................................................179  
Conventions for MIB Navigator Commands .........................................180  
Navigation Commands................................................................................181  
Other Commands........................................................................................190  
Special Commands.....................................................................................203  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Troubleshooting CSX400 Hardware ...........................................................208  
Power (PWR) LED is OFF....................................................................208  
Processor (CPU) LED is OFF...............................................................208  
Processor (CPU) LED is RED ..............................................................208  
Troubleshooting the LAN ............................................................................208  
Collision (CLN) LED is RED .................................................................208  
Link (LNK) LED is OFF.........................................................................208  
Troubleshooting the WAN...........................................................................209  
Link (LNK) LED is OFF.........................................................................209  
Link (LNK) LED is RED ........................................................................209  
Link (LNK) LED is AMBER ...................................................................209  
Status 1 (STS1) LED is OFF ................................................................209  
Status 1 (STS1) LED is RED................................................................210  
Status 1 (STS1) LED is AMBER...........................................................211  
Status 1 (STS1) LED is GREEN...........................................................211  
Status 2 (STS2) LED is OFF ................................................................212  
Status 2 (STS 2) LED is RED WPIM-HDSL Installed in CSX400.........213  
Status 2 (STS2) LED is AMBER...........................................................213  
Status 2 (STS2) LED is GREEN...........................................................213  
Test (TST) LED is AMBER (blinking) ...................................................214  
Investigating Software Configuration Problems ..........................................214  
Connection to Device Fails During Software Configuration..................214  
User Cannot Communicate with Remote Network Station...................215  
APPENDIX A  
EPIM SPECIFICATIONS  
Introduction .................................................................................................217  
EPIM-T........................................................................................................217  
EPIM-F1 and EPIM-F2................................................................................218  
EPIM-F3......................................................................................................220  
EPIM-C........................................................................................................221  
Connector Type....................................................................................221  
Grounding.............................................................................................221  
EPIM-A and EPIM-X (AUI Port) ..................................................................222  
x
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
APPENDIX B  
WPIM CABLE SPECIFICATIONS  
WPIM-T1.....................................................................................................223  
WPIM-SY ....................................................................................................225  
EIA-449.................................................................................................226  
V.35 ......................................................................................................227  
EIA-232.................................................................................................229  
X.21 ......................................................................................................230  
EIA-530, EIA-530 ALT A, EIA-530 A, and EIA-530 A ALT A................231  
WPIM-DDS..................................................................................................233  
WPIM-E1.....................................................................................................234  
WPIM-DI......................................................................................................236  
WPIM-HDSL................................................................................................237  
WPIM-S/T....................................................................................................238  
APPENDIX C  
SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS COMPLIANCE  
CSX400, CSX400-DC, and WPIM Environmental Requirements...............239  
CSX400 Specifications and Compliance Standards ...................................239  
CSX400-DC Specifications and Compliance Standards.............................240  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC Regulatory Compliance.....................................240  
CSX400-DC Regulatory Compliance (Only) ...............................................240  
Individual WPIM Regulatory Compliance....................................................241  
WPIM-TI ...............................................................................................241  
WPIM-SY..............................................................................................242  
WPIM-DDS...........................................................................................242  
WPIM-E1 ..............................................................................................243  
WPIM-DI...............................................................................................243  
WPIM-S/T.............................................................................................243  
WPIM-HDSL.........................................................................................244  
APPENDIX D  
APPENDIX E  
APPENDIX F  
INDEX  
NETWORK INFORMATION WORKSHEETS  
FCC PART 68 - USER’S INFORMATION FOR CSX400 AND CSX400-DC  
GLOSSARY  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xii CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Introduction  
Welcome to the Cabletron Systems CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide. This guide provides  
basic configuration information, hardware specifications and troubleshooting tips for the CSX400  
and CSX400-DC. This guide also provides background information about 10BASE-T Ethernet  
Local Area Networks (LANs) and guidelines for routing and bridging over Wide Area Networks  
(WANs).  
The CSX400 and CSX400-DC have identical features and functions with the exception  
of their power source connection. The CSX400 connects to an ac power source and  
NOTE  
the CSX400-DC connects to a dc power source. Both the CSX400 and the  
CSX400-DC are referred to as the CSX400, unless otherwise specified in this guide.  
Related Documentation  
Use the READ ME FIRST! document included with the CSX400 to set up your computer before  
starting configuration.  
Use the Cabletron Systems QuickSTART Guide (the CD insert of the QuickSET CD case) to  
install the CSX400.  
Use the appropriate Cabletron Systems WPIM Local Management Guide to connect your CSX400  
to a WAN using a TELNET connection.  
How to Use This Guide  
This guide along with the READ ME FIRST! document and the QuickSTART Guide provide the  
necessary information to install and configure the CSX400. Read all of these documents before  
installing the CSX400.  
This guide is organized as follows:  
Chapter 1, Introduction, details document conventions and provides information on getting help.  
Chapter 2, About the CSX400, describes the hardware components and software protocols and  
features.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Chapter 3, ISDN Line Ordering and Configuration, provides the information you need to order  
ISDN service from the telephone company.  
Chapter 4, Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration, describes the router configuration  
process.  
Chapter 5, Ethernet Cabling Requirements, describes the basic cabling requirements for an  
Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).  
Chapter 6, Installation, provides detailed installation instructions for attaching the CSX400 and  
CSX400-DC to a network.  
Chapter 7, CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET, provides instructions on connecting the  
CSX400 to a Wide Area Network (WAN) using Cabletron Systems QuickSET management utility.  
Chapter 8, General Configuration Using Local Management, provides instructions for  
configuring the CSX400 through a TELNET connection.  
Chapter 9, MIB Navigator, explains how to use the MIB Navigator utility.  
Chapter 10, Troubleshooting, provides detailed troubleshooting tips using the LANVIEW LEDs  
on the CSX400.  
Appendix A, EPIM Specifications, provides hardware specifications and pinout information for  
available Cabletron Systems Ethernet Port Interface Modules (EPIMs).  
Appendix B, WPIM Cable Specifications, provides part number and connector information for  
WPIMs.  
Appendix C, Specifications and Standards Compliance, contains hardware specifications and  
safety and compliance standards for the CSX400.  
Appendix D, Network Information Worksheets, provides blank network information  
worksheets.  
Appendix E, FCC Part 68 - User’s Information For CSX400 and CSX400-DC, provides  
instructions required to comply with FCC Rules, Part 68.  
Appendix F, Glossary, defines commonly used terms.  
2
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Document Conventions  
The following conventions are used throughout this guide:  
Note symbol. Calls the reader’s attention to any item of information that may be of  
special importance.  
NOTE  
Tip symbol. Conveys helpful hints concerning procedures or actions.  
TIP  
Caution symbol. Contains information essential to avoid damage to the equipment.  
!
CAUTION  
Electrical Hazard Warning symbol. Warns against an action that could result in  
personal injury or death due to an electrical hazard.  
Warning symbol. Warns against an action that could result in personal injury or death.  
WARNING  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Getting Help  
If you need additional support related to this device, or if you have any questions, comments, or  
suggestions concerning this manual, contact the Cabletron Systems Global Call Center:  
Phone  
(603) 332-9400  
Internet mail  
support@ctron.com  
FTP  
ctron.com (134.141.197.25)  
anonymous  
Login  
Password  
your email address  
BBS  
(603) 335-3358  
Modem setting  
8N1: 8 data bits, No parity, 1 stop bit  
For additional information about Cabletron Systems or our products,  
visit our World Wide Web site: http://www.cabletron.com/  
For technical support, select Service and Support.  
Before calling the Cabletron Systems Global Call Center, have the following information ready:  
•
•
•
Your Cabletron Systems service contract number  
A description of the failure  
A description of any action(s) already taken to resolve the problem (e.g., changing mode  
switches, rebooting the unit, etc.)  
•
•
•
•
•
The serial and revision numbers of all involved Cabletron Systems products in the network  
A description of your network environment (layout, cable type, etc.)  
Network load and frame size at the time of trouble (if known)  
The device history (i.e., have you returned the device before, is this a recurring problem, etc.)  
Any previous Return Material Authorization (RMA) numbers  
4
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
About the CSX400  
The CSX400 (Figure 1) is an access device that provides Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN)  
connectivity via two Ethernet Port Interface Modules (EPIMs), and offers high-speed Wide Area  
Network (WAN) access to remote sites via two WAN Port Interface Modules (WPIMs). The  
CSX400 supports IEEE 802.1d transparent bridging, IP and IPX routing, ISDN, Dynamic Host  
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), Network Address Translation (NAT) routing, and Inverse  
Multiplexing (IMUX) between Ethernet LANs across a WAN.  
The CSX400 operates from a standard ac power source and the CSX400-DC operates from a dc  
voltage source to meet all the requirements for installation into Telephone Central Office facilities.  
Figure 1 The CSX400  
CSX400 Hardware  
This section details the CSX400 hardware capabilities.  
WAN Connection  
The CSX400 supports Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) including: Link Control Protocol (LCP),  
BNCP, IPCP, IPXCP, LQM, Multilink Protocol (MP) and CHAP and PAP, ISDN-BRI and Frame  
Relay protocols through one of the following WAN port interface modules (WPIMs):  
•
The WPIM-T1 provides a T1 interface through a front panel RJ45 port and includes a built-in  
Channel Service Unit/Digital Service Unit (CSU/DSU) for direct connection to a T1 line. The  
WPIM-T1 provides both Full T1 or Fractional T1 using 56 or 64 Kbps Time Slots, with a total  
throughput of up to 1.544 Mbps.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the CSX400  
•
The WPIM-Sync provides a synchronous serial connection of up to 2.048 Mbps to external  
communications equipment (e.g., a multiplexer or CSU/DSU). The WPIM-Sync uses a  
subminiature 26-pin connector that supports the electrical signal interfaces listed below.  
Appendix B, provides complete part number and cable pinout information for the following  
electrical signal interfaces:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EIA-RS449  
V.35  
EIA-RS232D  
X.21  
EIA-RS530  
EIA-530A  
RS530 ALT A  
RS530A ALT A  
•
•
•
The WPIM-DDS provides a 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps Digital Data Service (DDS) connection. The  
WPIM-DDS supports remote CSU diagnostic or 64 Kbps clear channel loopback and  
non-latching remote DSU diagnostic loopback.  
The WPIM-E1 provides an E1 interface through a front panel RJ45 port and includes a built-in  
CSU/DSU for direct connection to an E1 line. The WPIM-E1 provides both Full E1 or  
Fractional E1 using 56 or 64 Kbps Time Slots with a total throughput of up to 2 Mbps.  
The WPIM-DI provides a T1 interface through a front panel RJ45 port and includes a built-in  
CSU/DSU for direct connection to a T1 line. The WPIM-DI provides both Full T1 or Fractional  
T1 using 56 or 64 Kbps Time Slots and also provides a second Drop-and-Insert interface, which  
allows more than one device, such as a PBX, to share a single T1 connection.  
•
•
The WPIM-S/T provides an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 128 Kbps Basic Rate  
Interface (BRI) for the CSX400. The WPIM-S/T provides an ISDN back-up link for a remote  
site or branch office when the main WPIM for a frame relay or leased line loses a connection  
or becomes disabled. An NT-1 adapter is necessary for this interface in the United States.  
The WPIM-HDSL provides a connection for users in a campus environment, or have access to  
local subscriber loops, who want to send their data over their existing telephone lines, that may  
run between floors, buildings, or other physical structures, at rates of up to 1.544Mbps. HDSL  
supports line lengths of up to 3, 657 meters (12,000 feet) over 24American Wire Gauge (AWG)  
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cabling.  
6
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
•
The WPIM-T1/DDS provides both a T1 and DDS interface that allows you to easily switch  
between the two interfaces by changing the physical cabling and reconfiguring QuickSET for  
the desired interface. The WPIM-T1/DDS has the capabilities of both the WPIM-T1 and  
WPIM-DDS.  
Ethernet LAN Connection  
The CSX400 provides 10 Mbps Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 support through two Cabletron Systems  
Ethernet Port Interface Modules (EPIMs), which are available in a variety of media types.  
Appendix A, EPIM Specifications, details the available EPIMs that can be used to configure the  
CSX400 for an Ethernet connection.  
FLASH EEPROMs — The CSX400 uses a FLASH Electrically Erasable Programmable  
Read-Only Memory (EEPROM) that allows new and updated firmware to be downloaded in  
conjunction with Cabletron Systems QuickSET or any device using BootP or TFTP protocols.  
LANVIEW LEDs — Cabletron Systems LANVIEW Status Monitoring and Diagnostics System is  
a troubleshooting tool that helps in the diagnosing of power failures, collisions, cable faults, and  
link problems. The LANVIEW LEDs are located on the CSX400 front panel.  
RESET Button — The front panel RESET button reboots the CSX400 and initializes the  
processor. The RESET button also is used with the mode switches to clear NVRAM.  
Remote Management Capabilities  
The CSX400 can be remotely managed with any SNMP network management system including  
the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
Cabletron Systems SPECTRUM for Open Systems  
Cabletron Systems Remote SPECTRUM Portable Management Applications (SPMAs)  
Cabletron Systems QuickSET  
Cabletron Systems SPECTRUM Element Manager (SPEL)  
Third Party SNMP compliant Network Management Packages  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
Optional Features  
Rack Mounting Capabilities — The CSX400 can be installed in a 19-inch rack with the  
included mounting brackets and screws. Refer to Chapter 6 Installation, for complete rack  
mounting instructions.  
Hardware Data Compression Module (CSX-COMP/ENCR) — The same industry standard  
STAC Electronics Stacker LZS Compression algorithm supported by CSX400 software is made  
available by an optional hardware data compression module that accelerates data compression for  
the CSX400 over PPP and Frame Relay. Depending on the packet type and size, hardware data  
compression provides a minimum of 2:1 data compression, giving 3 Mbps throughput on each T-1  
WPIM interface. To use the hardware data compression module, compatible equipment (such as  
the CSX400, CSX200, and HSIM-W6 or other vendors’ equipment which conforms to the  
applicable standards), must be in use at both ends of the WAN link. When the hardware data  
compression module is installed on the board, it automatically assumes the compression task from  
software. There is no configuration necessary to prioritize hardware over software compression.  
CSX400 Firmware Support  
The CSX400 firmware supports IEEE 802.1d bridging, and IP and IPX routing, and OSI Layer 2  
Inverse Multiplexing (IMUX), which allows both WAN channels to be used as a single, high  
bandwidth, WAN channel. Wide Area Networking includes Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP),  
Frame Relay, and ISDN. Remote access is via Full or Fractional T1, E1, Synchronous, Digital  
Data Service, ISDN BRI, or HDSL connections.  
This device supports industry-standard protocols, security features, compression algorithms and  
network management tools to ensure interoperability with equipment from other vendors.  
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet  
The CSX400 provides a standard 802.3 Media Access Control (MAC) layer for Ethernet  
communications. All bridging and routing protocols are supported across the Ethernet link.  
8
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
WAN Protocols  
This device supports the following WAN protocols over the WAN port:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Point-to-Point Compression Control Protocol (CCP) as defined by RFC 1962  
Inverse Multiplexing (IMUX)  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) as defined by RFC 1541  
Network Address Translation (NAT) routing as defined by RFC 1631  
Point-to-Point Protocol (LCP) as defined by RFC 1661  
Point-to-Point Protocol (BNCP) as defined by RFC 1638  
Point-to-Point Protocol (IPCP) as defined by RFC 1332  
Point-to-Point Protocol (IPXCP) as defined by RFC 1552  
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) and Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol  
(CHAP) under PPP as defined by RFC 1994  
•
•
•
Point-to-Point Protocol Line Quality Monitoring (LQM) as defined by RFC 1333  
Point-to-Point Protocol Multilink Protocol (MP) as defined by RFC 1717  
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Interface (BRI) as defined by Q.921/  
Q.931  
•
Frame Relay Link Management Interface (LMI) as defined by ANSI T1.617 Annex D and ITU  
Q.933 Annex A  
•
•
Frame Relay Data Encapsulation as defined by RFC 1490  
Frame Relay Data Compression Protocol (DCP) as defined by FRF.9  
PPP is a data link layer industry standard WAN protocol for transferring multi-protocol data traffic  
over point-to-point connections. With this protocol, options such as security data compression, and  
network protocols can be negotiated over the connection.  
Frame Relay is a packet-switching data communications protocol that statistically multiplexes  
many data conversations over a single transmission link. Data compression allows Frame Relay to  
negotiate compression over Frame Relay permanent virtual channels (PVCs).  
ISDN BRI is a switched Data Link layer control protocol which uses digital signaling to place a  
call into an ISDN network. Once the call is made, PPP is then used to transfer data.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
Firmware Data Compression  
The STAC Electronics Stacker LZS Compression algorithm provides a minimum of 2:1 firmware  
data compression for the CSX400 over PPP and Frame Relay. Firmware data compression is  
supported in software on each WAN interface for line speeds of up to 256 Kbps. per WPIM, which  
is equivalent to four DS0 channels. To use data compression, compatible equipment, (such as the  
CSX400, CSX200, and HSIM-W6 or other vendors’ equipment which conforms to the applicable  
standards), must be in use at both ends of the WAN link. This firmware method of data  
compression is used as the default, if the hardware compression module is not installed.  
Inverse Multiplexing (IMUX)  
Cabletron Systems products that support IMUX, such as the CSX400, HSIM-W6 and  
HSIM-4T1, must exist on both ends of the WAN link for the IMUX function to work.  
NOTE  
Both bridging and routing functions are disabled when using the IMUX function.  
Cabletron Systems Inverse Multiplexing (IMUX) feature provides enhanced throughput for users  
by doing each of the following:  
•
The IMUX function evenly distributes a data packet stream from the LAN interface through the  
two WAN interfaces on the CSX400. Since the data traffic is equally shared between the two  
Full T1 interfaces, each with 1.5 Mbps throughput, the total throughput over the logical link is  
3 Mbps, or 6 Mbps full-duplex operation with the optional hardware compression module  
(CSX-COMP/ENCR) installed in the CSX400.  
•
The IMUX function passes packet sequence information over the WAN using the Point-to Point  
Protocol (PPP) and a WAN Encapsulated Ethernet Frame Type to support data coherency on  
both ends of the link.  
•
•
Data packet streams received by the WAN Interfaces on the CSX400 at the other end of the  
WAN link are then recombined, ordered, and transmitted to the Ethernet 1 interface.  
The IMUX function is fully configurable using QuickSET, which is discussed in the Bridging  
and Routing Configuration section of Chapter 7 and the MIB Navigator command set in  
Chapter 9.  
10 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
HDLC  
Cabletron Systems has provided the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) protocol which is used  
in conjunction with the Inverse Multiplexing (IMUX) feature and the WPIM-HDSL to conserve a  
user’s WAN bandwidth between two Cabletron Systems products, over a point-to-point  
connection. Cabletron Systems products such as the CSX400, CSX200, and HSIM-W6 must be in  
use on both ends of the WAN link for these functions to work. The HDLC (RAW) protocol reduces  
the amount of overhead information that needs to be contained within each data packet to direct it  
to its destination. This decreased packet overhead provides the IMUX and HDSL functions with  
more bandwidth to transfer user data.  
DHCP and NAT  
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Network Address Translation (NAT)  
method eliminates the expense of purchasing limited public IP addresses for each client on a local  
network, and the need to re-configure a client if it is moved to a different network.  
The CSX400 acts as a DHCP server that allows individual clients (PCs, network equipment) to  
take turns using a range of private IP addresses (often referred to as local IP addresses), and  
provides optional secondary setup features for these clients on a per-port basis. The CSX400  
distributes these addresses dynamically assigning a local IP address to an individual client from a  
range of 253 available addresses in its table on a first-come-first-served basis. This local IP address  
is then “leased” for a predetermined amount of time, which is configured for the particular port.  
Each Ethernet port provides DHCP services for one Class C subnet and secondary setup features  
for individual clients that support the use of a default gateway, domain name and WINs server.  
On the Wide Area Network (WAN) side, the Network Address Translation (NAT) routing method  
is used to enable clients assigned with local IP addresses to use the public IP address(es) of the  
CSX400 WAN interface(s) to access the WAN.  
A private or “local” network is referred to as a sub network that is using private or  
“local” IP addresses. An “outside” network refers to a Wide Area Network (WAN)  
NOTE  
commonly known as an Internet, an intranet is an “Internet” in use on a facility or  
campus where registered public IP addresses are required.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
The NAT method allows several DHCP clients on a sub network to connect to WAN clients by  
allowing the DHCP clients to share a single public IP address. When the CSX400 uses NAT, the  
NAT method modifies the IP headers and addresses, and the selected fields in upper layer protocol  
headers. This is done to replace the hidden local IP addresses from the sub network with one or  
more public InterNic assigned IP addresses that can be sent over the outside network on the  
CSX400 WAN interfaces. Once the CSX400 is assigned at least one public IP address, over 250 IP  
clients can share this address simultaneously using NAT. This public IP address is assigned  
statically by the Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)  
PPP is a data link layer industry standard WAN protocol for transferring multi-protocol data traffic  
over point-to-point connections. It is suitable for both high-speed synchronous ports as well as  
lower speed asynchronous dial-up ports. With this protocol, options such as security and network  
protocols can be negotiated over the connection.  
This device supports synchronous PPP over the ISDN port. In Single Link Mode, PPP uses one  
ISDN B channel for data transmission. PPP runs over each ISDN B channel for two separate  
conversations (split B-channel). In Multi-Link Protocol Mode, PPP simultaneously sends and  
receives data over two ISDN B-channels on the same connection to optimize bandwidth usage.  
The STAC Electronics Stacker LZS Compression Protocol is supported over PPP providing up to  
4:1 data compression.  
PAP and CHAP Security  
The CSX400 supports the Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) and Challenge Handshake  
Authentication Protocol (CHAP) under PPP.  
PAP provides verification of passwords between devices using a 2-way handshake. One device  
(peer) sends the system name and password to the other device (authenticator). Then the  
authenticator checks the peer’s password against the configured remote peer’s password and  
returns acknowledgment.  
CHAP is more secure than PAP as unencrypted passwords are not sent across the network. CHAP  
uses a 3-way handshake and supports full or half-duplex operation.  
12 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
In half-duplex operation, the authenticator device challenges the peer device by generating a  
CHAP challenge, and the challenge contains an MD5 algorithm with a random number that has  
your encrypted password and system name. The peer device then applies a one-way hash  
algorithm to the random number and returns this encrypted information along with the system  
name in the CHAP response. The authenticator then runs the same algorithm and compares the  
result with the expected value. This authentication method depends upon a password or secret,  
known only to both ends locally.  
Full-duplex operation places an additional step to the half-duplex operation that mirrors the  
operation discussed above for a peer to validate the authenticator. The peer device challenges the  
authenticator by generating a CHAP challenge, and the authenticator returns a CHAP response.  
The peer device challenges the authenticator device by generating a CHAP challenge, and the  
challenge contains an MD5 algorithm with a random number that has your encrypted password  
and system name. The authenticator device then applies a one-way hash algorithm to the random  
number and returns this encrypted information along with the system name in the CHAP response.  
The peer device then runs the same algorithm and compares the result with the expected value.  
This authentication method depends upon a password or secret, known only to both ends locally.  
LQM  
Link Quality Monitoring (LQM) is a link control mechanism used with PPP to determine when  
and how often a link is dropping data in units of packets and octets. Link Quality Monitoring  
accomplishes this by providing Link-Quality-Reports to determine if the quality of the link is  
adequate for operation. Link Quality Monitoring provides separate measurements for both  
incoming and outgoing packets that are communicated to both ends of the link. The PPP LQM  
mechanism carefully defines the Link-Quality-Report packet formats, and specifies reference  
points for all data transmission and reception measurements. The LQM implementation maintains  
successfully received packet and octet counts, and periodically transmits this information to its  
peer using Link-Quality-Report packets.  
Multilink Protocol  
Multilink Protocol (MP) is an extension of PPP that controls the way frames are transferred across  
several links whenever a single link is not sufficient to meet the requirements of your present  
traffic load. Multilink Protocol establishes several simultaneous links between two end points over  
switched circuits (dial-up lines) in an ISDN network, and dynamically adjusts the bandwidth  
demands between available links to maintain an effective data transfer.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
ISDN  
ISDN provides an inexpensive switched digital access to remote sites. The ISDN BRI standard  
provides for two high speed 64 Kbps bearer (B) channels used for voice or data connections and  
one 16 Kbps signaling data (D) channel used for call setup, signaling and other information. ISDN  
allows all types of information to be transmitted including voice, data, fax and video. Multiple  
devices can be linked to a single ISDN connection, each having their own telephone number. Two  
or more channels can be combined into a single larger transmission pipe offering variable  
transmission speeds.  
The CSX400 supports one ISDN BRI line and either or both of the B channels for transferring  
data. If the two B channels are used for separate connections, each provides up to 64 Kbps transfer  
rates. Both channels can be used together to provide uncompressed data transfer at up to 128 Kbps.  
The CSX400 can also transfer compressed data at up to 512 Kbps.  
A Network Terminator device (NT1) provides the interface between ISDN terminal (router)  
equipment and the ISDN service provider. In the U.S., the NT1 is provided by the customer;  
outside the U.S., the NT1 is provided by the ISDN service provider. The CSX400 supports the  
WPIM-S/T by providing an S/T interface that requires an external NT1.  
Telephone Switch Support  
The following telephone switch types are supported within the U.S.:  
•
•
•
National ISDN 1 (NI-1)  
AT&T 5ESS with Custom Software  
DMS-100  
Outside of the U.S. the following switch types are supported:  
•
•
•
•
•
NET3 (European ISDN)  
NET3SW (European Swiss-variant)  
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone)  
KDD (Kokusai Denshin Denwa Co., Ltd.)  
French Delta (VN4) switches  
14 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
ISDN Back-up  
The ISDN back-up feature provides a back-up link for a remote site or branch office when one or  
more primary WAN interfaces for a frame relay circuit or a nailed-up PPP connection fails. The  
WPIM-S/T serves as the backup medium for this primary connection. The WPIM-S/T uses the  
ISDN interfaces to back-up any primary interfaces which have been configured for ISDN back-up.  
Time to Connect, Time to Disconnect, Connect Retries, Back-up Override, Input Idle Time-out  
and Output Idle Time-out, are the six back-up parameters used to manage the ISDN Back-up  
feature on the CSX400, and are described as follows:  
Time to Connect — Time to Connect allows you to configure the amount of seconds the primary  
interface can be in a failed state, before attempting to switch over to the back-up interface.  
Time to Disconnect — Time to Disconnect allows you to configure the amount of seconds the  
restored primary interface must remain connected, before attempting to switch over from the  
back-up interface.  
Connect Retries — Connect Retries allows you to configure the number of tries to restore the  
back-up interface, before giving up.  
Backup Override — Backup Override forces the back-up interface to remain connected, and  
does not allow the back-up interface to switch back to the primary interface, even if the primary  
interface is restored.  
Input Idle Time-out — Input Idle Time-out allows you to determine the amount of time necessary  
for data packets to be received, before the interface is automatically disconnected.  
Output Idle Time-out — Output Idle Time-out allows you to determine the amount of time  
necessary for data packets to be transmitted, before the interface is automatically disconnected.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
HDSL  
High-bit rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) technology uses existing copper twisted pair cables  
designed for conventional analog voice transmission from a telephone carrier servicing area as a  
low-cost alternative to the quality and speed of fiber optic cables, and provides high-speed  
full-duplex digital transmission links of up to 1.544 Mbps. The WPIM-HDSL is easy to install in  
your network over existing telephone lines, and it is a portable investment if a business, or  
individual user plans to relocate.  
HDSL is a direct connection technology that allows connections to be made for distances of up to  
12,000 feet over 24 American Wire Gauge (AWG) unconditioned Twisted Pair wire. To obtain the  
Full T1 line Rate of 1.544 Mbps, two wire pairs are necessary (four wires). If one pair of wires is  
used (two wires), then data rates of 772 Kbps are supported, which is equivalent to one-half of a  
T1 line.  
Bridging and Routing  
Bridging — Bridging connects two or more separate networks together. The bridge examines a  
portion of each network frame called the header. This header contains control information for the  
frame. The bridge compares the destination address of the frame to a table of source addresses  
(bridges dynamically learn the physical location of devices by logging the source addresses of  
each frame and the bridge port the frame was received on in the source address table). In  
transparent bridging, the decision to forward the frame is based on this comparison. If the address  
indicates that the sending station and the destination station are on the same side of the bridge, the  
frame is not forwarded across the bridge. If the addresses do not indicate that, the bridge forwards  
the broadcast frame across the bridge to the other network(s).  
Bridging allows frames to be sent to all destinations regardless of the network protocols used. It  
also allows protocols that cannot be routed (such as NETBIOS) to be forwarded, and optimizes  
internetwork capacity by localizing traffic on LAN segments. A bridge extends the physical reach  
of networks beyond the limits of each LAN segment. Filters can be used to increase network  
security in bridged networks, and restrict message forwarding by using user-built address  
tables (non-transparent bridging).  
16 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
Routing — Routing provides a way to transfer user data from source to destination over different  
LAN and WAN links using one or more network protocol formats. Routing relies on routing  
address tables to determine the best path for each packet. Routing tables can be seeded (i.e.,  
addresses for remote destinations are placed in the table along with network address masks and a  
metric for path latency). Routing tables are also built dynamically (i.e., the location of remote  
stations, hosts and networks are updated through inter-router protocols). Routing helps to increase  
network capacity by localizing traffic on LAN segments and broadcasts that would result from  
bridged traffic. It also provides security by isolating traffic on segmented LANs. Routing extends  
the world-wide reach of networks.  
CSX400 Bridging and Routing — The CSX400 can operate as a bridge, a router, or both. The  
CSX400 operates as a router for network protocols that are supported when routing is enabled and  
operates as a bridge when bridging is enabled. When both bridging and routing are enabled,  
routing takes precedence over bridging; i.e., the CSX400 uses the protocol address information of  
the packet to route the packet to the correct destination. However, if the protocol is not supported,  
the CSX400 operates as a bridge and uses the MAC address information to send the packet.  
Operation of the CSX400 is influenced by routing and bridging controls and filters set during  
CSX400 configuration. General IP routing, and routing or bridging from specific remote routers  
are controls set during the configuration process.  
IEEE 802.1d Bridging — The CSX400 supports the IEEE 802.1d standard for LAN to LAN  
bridging. Bridging is provided over PPP and Frame Relay as well as adjacent LAN ports. The  
bridging software uses transparent bridging. When the CSX400 is configured as a bridge, the unit  
bridges data packets to the destination, regardless of the network protocols used.  
The CSX400 uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm to provide bridging redundancy while preventing  
data loops and duplicate data. This is a self-learning bridge, i.e., the bridge builds and updates an  
address table with each MAC source address and associated information when the packets are  
received.  
IP Routing — IP routing support provides the ability to process TCP/IP frames at the network  
layer for routing. IP routing support includes the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) that allows  
the exchange of routing information on a TCP/IP network. The CSX400 receives and broadcasts  
RIP messages to adjacent routers and workstations.  
IPX Routing — Internet Packet Exchange (IPX) routing support provides the ability to process  
Novell proprietary frames at the network layer for routing. IPX routing support includes both  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) that allows the  
exchange of routing information on a Novell NetWare network. The SAP provides routers and  
servers containing SAP agents with a means of exchanging internetwork service information.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
Bridging and Routing Protocol Filtering  
Filtering is used to allow efficient usage of network resources and provide security for your  
network and hosts.  
IP Internet Firewall — The CSX400 supports IP Internet Firewall filtering to prevent  
unauthorized access to your system and network resources from the Internet or a corporate  
Intranet. Security can be configured to permit or deny IP traffic. The security is established by  
configuring IP access filters, which are based on source IP address, source mask, destination IP  
address, destination mask, protocol type, and application port identifiers for both Transmission  
Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) protocols. These IP access filters  
allow individual IP source and destination pair filtering as well as IP address ranges and wild  
carding to match any IP address. These Firewall filters can be defined to allow inbound only,  
outbound only, or bi-directional IP communication up to the UDP and TCP application port level.  
Firewall access filters provide a lot of flexibility to establish a powerful IP security barrier. The  
CSX400 supports the IP Access Control (from the ctip-mib) Internet Firewall Filter.  
Bridge Filtering — Bridge filtering allows a network administrator to control the flow of packets  
across the CSX400. Bridge filtering can be used to “deny” or “allow” packets based on a “matched  
pattern” using a specified position and hexadecimal content within the packet. This enables  
restricting or forwarding of messages based on address, protocol, or data content. Common uses  
include preventing access to remote networks, controlling unauthorized access to the local  
network, and limiting unnecessary traffic.  
The CSX400 supports the following Bridge Filters:  
•
•
dot1dStatic Filters (IETF RFC1493)  
Ethernet Special Filtering Database (from the ctbridge-mib)  
System Passwords  
System passwords allow you to control access to the CSX400 by establishing three passwords.  
Each password provides varying levels of access to the CSX400. The default password for each  
access level is pre-set to public. If you do not wish to establish a password, press ENTER, the  
default password is automatically selected.  
The following definitions explain each of the three levels of access:  
read-only — This access level allows reading of device parameters not including system  
passwords.  
18 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
read-write — This access level allows editing of some device configuration parameters not  
including changing system passwords.  
super-user — This access level allows full management privileges. At this level you must access  
the CSX400 to run QuickSET.  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
The CSX400 provides SNMP agent support for the following: standard and Enterprise Specific  
Management Information Bases (MIBs), and support for standard and Enterprise Specific SNMP  
Traps. SNMP is also used internally for configuration of the CSX400. The active SNMP agent  
within the CSX400 accepts SNMP requests for status, statistics and configuration updates.  
Communication with the SNMP agent occurs over the LAN or WAN connection. Any  
management application using SNMP over UDP/IP has access to the local SNMP agent.  
SNMP MIB Support  
SNMP MIBs are databases of objects used for managing and determining the status and  
configuration of an SNMP compliant device.  
The following SNMP MIBs are supported by the CSX400:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MIB IIRFC1213  
RMON MIBRFC1271  
DS1 and E1 MIBRFC1406(Digital Signal Level 1 [T1/E1 interface types])  
IETF Bridge MIBRFC1493  
IP Forwarding MIB RFC1354  
PPP LCP MIBRFC1471(Point-to-Point Protocol, Link Control Protocol)  
PPP IPCP MIBRFC1473(IP Control Protocol)  
PPP BNCP MIBRFC1474(Bridge Network Control Protocol)  
IPXCP MIBRFC1552  
Frame Relay DTE MIBRFC1490  
Security MIBRFC1472(CCP, PAP, and CHAP)  
RS-232 MIBRFC1317  
LQM MIBRFC1989  
PPP MP MIBRFC1990  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
Cabletron Enterprise MIBs  
Cabletron Enterprise MIBs include the following: CTWAN-MIB, CTMIB2-EXT-MIB,  
CTDOWNLOAD-MIB, CTBRIDGE-MIB, RREV-4-MIB, CTROUTER-MIB, CTFAULT-MIB,  
CTIP-MIB, CHASSIS-MIB, CTNETDIAG-MIB, IP-MIB, IPX-MIB, CTDEFAULT-MIB,  
CTNAT-MIB.TXT, CTDHCP-MIB.TXT, CTWAN-IMUX-MIB,  
CTISDN-DIALCONTROL-MIB, CTISDN-DCHANNEL-MIB, and  
CTISDN-REMOTEPROFILE-MIB.  
SNMP Trap Support  
SNMP Traps are notifications of network events sent by an SNMP compliant device to an SNMP  
management station.  
The following SNMP Traps are supported by the CSX400:  
IETF Standard Traps:  
•
•
•
Warm Start Trap Type Code #1RFC1214  
Bridge New Root TrapType Code #1RFC1493  
Bridge Topology Change TrapType Code #2RFC1493  
Cabletron Enterprise Traps:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Port Segmented TrapType Code #257(0x101)rrev4-mib  
Port Operational TrapType Code #258(0x102)rrev4-mib  
Port Link Up TrapType Code #259(0x103)rrev4-mib  
Port Link Down TrapType Code #260(0x106)rrev4-mib  
Environmental Temperature Hot TrapType Code #282(0x11A)rrev4-mib  
Environmental Temperature Normal TrapType Code #284(0x11C)rrev4-mib  
IP Event Log Change TrapType Code #1280(0x500)ctip-mib  
The following is a list of IP Events that are logged and create the IP Event Log Change Trap.  
•
•
•
•
IP Routing has been disabled on interface #  
IP Routing has been enabled on interface #  
IP Forwarding has been enabled on interface #  
IP MTU size has been changed on interface #  
20 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP Framing Type has been changed on interface #  
IP has detected Link UP on interface #  
IP has detected Link DOWN on interface #  
IP Primary address has been changed on interface #  
IP Secondary address has been changed on interface #  
IP Access Control Lists have been enabled on interface #  
IP Access Control Lists have been disabled on interface #  
IP has detected Port UP (WAN devices only)  
IP has detected Port DOWN (WAN devices only)  
IP Proxy ARP has been disabled on interface #  
IP Proxy ARP has been enabled on interface #  
IP RIP has been enabled on interface #  
IP RIP has been disabled on interface #  
IPX Event Log Change Trap Type Code #1281(0x501) ctipx-mib  
The following is a list of IPX Events that are logged and create the IPX Event Log Change Trap.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IPX Routing has been disabled on interface #  
IPX Routing has been enabled on interface #  
IPX Forwarding has been enabled on interface #  
IPX MTU size has been changed on interface #  
IPX Framing Type has been changed on interface #  
IPX has detected Link UP on interface #  
IPX has detected Link DOWN on interface #  
IPX Primary address has been changed on interface #  
IPX Access Control Lists have been enabled on interface #  
IPX Access Control Lists have been disabled on interface #  
IPX has detected Port UP (WAN devices only)  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the CSX400  
•
•
•
•
•
IPX has detected Port DOWN (WAN devices only)  
IPX RIP has been enabled on interface #  
IPX RIP has been disabled on interface #  
IPX SAP has been enabled on interface #  
IPX SAP has been disabled on interface #  
Software and Firmware Upgrades  
Software and Firmware upgrades can be performed remotely through the Windows-based  
QuickSET utility application. Refer to Chapter 7 for QuickSET instructions. QuickSET allows  
you to retrieve or upgrade the firmware, software, and configuration files from its Firmware  
Upgrade menu by selecting the TFTP/BootP Services window to access a TFTP (Trivial File  
Transfer Protocol) server.  
22 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
ISDN Line Ordering and Configuration  
This chapter provides ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line ordering and configuration  
information. It contains the following sections:  
•
•
•
•
•
Arranging ISDN Service  
Telephone Switch Support  
ISDN BRI Line Configuration  
SPIDs, Directory Numbers and Telephone Numbers  
Telephone Switch Parameters  
Read the first section in this chapter for an overview of the steps required to order ISDN service  
from your service provider (telephone company). The rest of the chapter details the information  
that the service provider needs to give you, and which you need to give to the service provider.  
Arranging ISDN Service  
The service provider requires certain information about the capabilities of the CSX400. You must  
give the service provider the required switch settings (parameters) for the provider’s central office  
switch. Consult with your service provider at least two months before you require the installation  
and use of the ISDN service.  
Complete the following steps to arrange your ISDN service:  
1. Contact the service provider and determine what type of ISDN central office switches are  
available (see Telephone Switch Support in this chapter).  
2. Supply the service provider with the provisioning information for their switch type to enable  
proper configuration of the ISDN line (see Telephone Switch Parameters in this chapter).  
3. Once the ISDN line is installed, ensure that the service provider supplies you with the following  
information:  
•
•
ISDN telephone numbers  
ISDN Service Profile Identifier numbers (SPIDs) and/or Directory Numbers (DNs) (see  
SPIDs, Directory Numbers and Telephone Numbers in this chapter).  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ISDN Line Ordering and Configuration  
Telephone Switch Support  
Your telephone company may offer a variety of ISDN switch types. You must contact your service  
provider and find out which type of ISDN service is available.  
The following switch types are currently supported by the CSX400 within the U.S.:  
•
•
•
National ISDN 1 (NI-1)  
AT&T 5ESS with Custom Software  
DMS-100  
Outside of the U.S. the following switch types are currently supported:  
•
•
•
•
•
NET3 (European ISDN)  
NET3SW (European Swiss-variant)  
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone)  
KDD (Kokusai Denshin Denwa Co., Ltd.)  
French Delta (VN4) switches  
ISDN BRI Line Configuration  
You need to order one Basic Rate Interface (BRI) ISDN line from your service provider. The Basic  
Rate Interface ISDN line provides two full duplex 64 (Kbps) B channels used for voice, data, fax,  
etc. and one full duplex 16 Kbps channel used for signaling. Each B channel can be used for a call;  
i.e., two calls can occur at the same time. Services vary from individual service providers.  
Full 64 Kbps for each channel (called clear channel) may not be available across the  
entire communications link. Today, many providers still use in-band signaling  
NOTE  
(the 8 Kbps signaling is taken from the B channel bandwidth) so that you may only  
achieve a 56 Kbps channel speed.  
The service provider requires some information from you about your configuration. You must  
provide your service provider with the required switch settings for the provider’s telephone switch  
(see Telephone Switch Parameters in this chapter). Consult with your service provider at least  
two months before requiring the installation and use of the ISDN service.  
24 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ISDN Line Ordering and Configuration  
In the U.S. and Canada, Network Terminator equipment (NT1) is required to provide an interface  
between the CSX400 and the ISDN line. The NT1 offers conversion between the two-wire twisted  
pair (U-loop interface) used by telephone companies and the four-wire terminal equipment (S/T  
Interface) as well as line-testing capabilities. External Network Terminator equipment comes with  
a power supply (built-in or external).  
In Europe and Japan, the telephone company provides the NT1 and offers end-users the S/T  
interface. The S refers to a connection between customer equipment in some ISDN configurations  
when a PBX is present. The T refers to the connection between the NT1 device and the CSX400.  
The ISDN pairs are the same wires that exist for analog telephone service. In most cases, the same  
wires can be used for the ISDN line. The EIA/TIA standard for wiring is Unshielded Twisted Pair  
(UTP) cable, Category 3 or above, 24 AWG (American Wire Gauge). The standard also  
recommends using 8-position RJ45 jacks for new ISDN service installation. No special  
conditioning is required; in some cases, conditioning must be removed.  
ISDN BRI Configurations  
ISDN BRI lines can be configured in point-to-point and multi-point configurations. With a  
point-to-point configuration, only one device is connected to the ISDN line. With a multi-point  
configuration, it is possible to have up to 8 devices (telephones, faxes, routers, etc.) connected to  
the line.  
Since the ISDN BRI line is used for a high speed LAN-to-LAN link, you must ensure that  
additional devices connected to the S/T interface allow sufficient access for the bandwidth  
requirements of the CSX400.  
SPIDs, Directory Numbers and Telephone Numbers  
The service provider gives you up to three sets of numbers for identifying the ISDN line and  
devices. You may be assigned none, one or two Service Profile Identifier numbers (SPIDs) or  
Directory Numbers (DNs) depending on the service provider and country.  
Phone Numbers  
Numbers used for others to dial into the ISDN B channels on your ISDN line (similar to analog  
line phone numbers).  
Directory Numbers  
Address assigned by the ISDN service provider for each device operating on the line. This number  
can be similar to the phone number. The Directory Number is not generally implemented outside  
the U.S.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ISDN Line Ordering and Configuration  
Service Profile Identifiers  
SPIDs, also assigned by the ISDN service provider, identify the services and features that the  
telephone company switch provides to the ISDN device. Commonly implemented in the U.S. and  
Canada, the SPID is often derived from the directory number, combined in a series with other  
digits. SPIDs are not generally implemented outside the U.S. and Canada.  
Telephone Switch Parameters  
Once you have contacted your service provider and learned the type of ISDN switch being used,  
refer to Table 1, Table 2, and Table 3. You must supply the appropriate provisioning information  
to the service provider to ensure proper configuration of the ISDN line.  
National ISDN 1 (NI-1) is a specification released by Bellcore outlining a basic set of  
ISDN services used for standardization by equipment vendors.  
NOTE  
Table 1 National ISDN 1 (NI-1)  
ISDN Switch Parameters  
Value  
B1  
Circuit Switched Data & Voice  
B2  
Circuit Switched Data & Voice  
D
Signaling Only  
Multipoint  
Terminal Type  
Display  
TEI  
Yes  
A
Off  
Dynamic  
MTERM  
MAXB CHL  
ACT USR  
CSD  
1
2
Y
2
CSD CHL  
Any  
26 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ISDN Line Ordering and Configuration  
Table 1 National ISDN 1 (NI-1) (Continued)  
ISDN Switch Parameters  
Value  
CSD Limit  
CA Pref  
EKTS  
2
1
No  
None  
Nail Up  
Table 2 AT&T 5ESS with Custom Software  
ISDN Switch Parameters  
Value  
B1  
Circuit Switched Data & Voice  
B2  
Circuit Switched Data & Voice  
D
Signaling Only  
Multipoint  
Terminal Type  
Display  
TEI  
No  
A
Off  
Dynamic  
MTERM  
MAXB CHL  
ACT USR  
CSD  
1
2
Y
2
CSD CHL  
CSD Limit  
CA Pref  
Nail Up  
Any  
2
1
None  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ISDN Line Ordering and Configuration  
ISDN Switch Parameters  
Table 3 DMS-100  
Value  
B1  
Circuit Switched Data & Voice  
B2  
Circuit Switched Data & Voice  
D
Signaling Only  
EKTS  
No  
Ringing Indicator  
Release Key  
PVER  
No  
No  
01  
TEI  
Dynamic  
64  
MAXKEYS  
Nail Up  
None  
28 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
This chapter explains the CSX400 ISDN-BRI configuration process and terminology. It also  
describes the information that is required for configuration.  
Configuration Process and Terminology  
During configuration, you specify information identifying the CSX400 and define the LAN and  
WAN connections of the CSX400. All of the remote routers to which this device may connect are  
added to a database called the remote router database that resides in the CSX400. Each remote  
router entry in the database defines the connection parameters, security features, route addressing  
and bridging function for the remote router (see the example in Figure 2). Routing and bridging  
are controlled by specific remote router entry information as well as general controls that are set  
after all other information is configured.  
REMOTE ROUTERS  
ROUTER A  
ROUTER B  
CSX400  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
ISDN SETTINGS  
ETHERNET LAN SETTINGS  
ROUTER C  
ISDN  
REMOTE ROUTER DATABASE  
REMOTE ROUTER B  
REMOTE ROUTER C  
ROUTER D  
Figure 2 Router A Configuration  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Collect Network Information  
Before you begin, you need to obtain information about the network to which you are adding the  
CSX400. Some of the information is obtained from your central site or remote site network  
administrator. Other information is obtained from your ISDN service provider.  
You must define the name and security password of the CSX400, ISDN line information and the  
Ethernet LAN IP and/or IPX address. You need to identify all of the remote routers and their  
routing and bridging capability, ISDN phone numbers, addressing and security information. You  
also need to decide whether you will use Internet Firewall Filtering if you are using IP routing. The  
following sections contain diagrams and tables to help you gather and organize the information.  
Names and Passwords  
You must choose a name for the CSX400 and the authentication password, both of which are used  
by a remote site to authenticate the target router. For each remote router, you must have the router  
name and its authentication password which is used by the CSX400 to authenticate the remote  
router. The name and password are used in both PAP and CHAP authentication. Figure 3 shows  
how this information is used.  
PAP AUTHENTICATION  
NEW YORK  
CHICAGO  
NEW YORK AND XYZ  
SYSTEM NAME = NEW YORK  
SYSTEM PASSWORD = XYZ  
SYSTEM NAME = CHICAGO  
SYSTEM PASSWORD = ABC  
ACCEPTED/REJECTED  
REMOTE ROUTER DATABASE  
REMOTE = CHICAGO  
PASSWORD = ABC  
REMOTE ROUTER DATABASE  
REMOTE = NEW YORK  
PASSWORD = XYZ  
Figure 3 PAP Authentication  
30 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
ISDN Line Information  
You need to know the telephone switch type and phone numbers associated with the ISDN line.  
The telephone switch types supported are listed in Telephone Switch Support. The service  
provider gives you up to three sets of numbers for identifying the ISDN line and attached devices.  
You may be assigned none, one or two SPIDs or DNs and this varies by service provider and  
country.  
Phone Numbers — Numbers used for others to dial into the ISDN B channels on your ISDN line  
(similar to analog line phone numbers).  
Directory Numbers — Address assigned by the ISDN service provider for each device operating  
on the line. This number can be similar to the phone number. The Directory Number is not  
generally implemented outside the U.S.  
Service Profile Identifications — SPIDs, also assigned by the ISDN service provider, identify  
the services and features that the switch provides to the ISDN device. Commonly implemented in  
the U.S. and Canada, the SPID is often derived from the directory number, combined in a series  
with other digits as shown in the example in Figure 4. SPIDs are not generally implemented  
outside of the U.S. and Canada.  
PHONE NUMBER 555-1001  
ISDN B CHANNEL  
CENTRAL OFFICE SWITCH  
CSX400  
ISDN B CHANNEL  
PHONE NUMBER 555-1002  
EXAMPLES:  
AT&T 5ESS  
NORTHERN TELECOM DMS-100 SWITCH  
DNs = 5551001, 5551002  
POINT-POINT MODE: NO SPIDs  
MULTI-POINT MODE: SPID = 0155510010 OR  
SPIDs = 01555100100, 01555100200  
SPIDs = 41555510011, 41555510022 OR  
415555100101, 415555100202  
Figure 4 Service Profile Identifications (SPIDs)  
Refer to Chapter 3, ISDN Line Ordering and Configuration, for further information about  
ISDN configurations and line ordering.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Network Information Diagrams  
It is helpful to draw a diagram including all locations, addresses, router names, etc. This section  
includes diagrams needed to configure the CSX400. You may need different addressing  
information depending on whether you are configuring IP routing and/or NetWare IPX routing.  
The diagrams show the information required to configure only the CSX400. If you need  
to configure both ends of the WAN link, you should label all information for the network.  
NOTE  
TCP/IP Routing — An IP address and subnet mask are required for the Ethernet LAN for the  
router connection. Each remote router ISDN WAN link may have local and remote IP addresses  
and subnet masks depending on the type of IP addressing as shown in Figure 5. The IP routing  
table in the CSX400 can be “seeded” with addressing information for networks/stations beyond  
the remote router.  
NETWORK INFORMATION LAYOUT  
ETHERNET LAN  
IP ADDRESS  
PC  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
CSX400  
SYSTEM NAME  
MESSAGE PAP/CHAP  
PASSWORD  
CSX400 WAN IP  
ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
(IF REQUIRED)  
ISDN LINE  
SWITCH TYPE  
SPIDs, DNs  
ISDN  
REMOTE ROUTER  
WAN IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
REMOTE LAN NETWORK  
IP ADDRESSES  
SUBNET MASKS  
METRICS  
REMOTE ISDN  
PHONE NUMBERS  
(IF REQUIRED)  
REMOTE ROUTER  
ROUTER NAME  
PAP/CHAP PASSWORD  
NETWORK AND STATIONS BEYOND  
THE REMOTE ROUTER  
Figure 5 Network Information Layout  
32 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
TCP/IP Route Addresses — If the CSX400 is to direct traffic to networks or stations beyond the  
remote router, the routing table in the CSX400 can be “seeded” with static IP routes. An IP route  
includes an IP address, subnet mask and metric. The metric is a number representing the perceived  
cost in reaching the remote network or station.  
The CSX400 routing table must be seeded statically so that it dials out to the appropriate remote  
router when IP traffic is targeted to networks and stations beyond that remote router. After the link  
is established, RIP update packets are dynamically added to the routing table. Seeding the routing  
table is not necessary when the CSX400 never dials out; it discovers remote networks and stations  
beyond the calling router as soon as RIP updates arrive (provided the remote router supports RIP  
and RIP packets are allowed to flow on the WAN link).  
TCP/IP Default Route — One default route should be designated in the routing table for all  
traffic that cannot be directed to other specific routes. You need to define the default route for a  
remote router if the CSX400 will be placing calls to that remote router.  
Source (Target) and Remote WAN IP Addresses — You may need to specify a Source WAN IP  
address and/or a Remote WAN IP address for the WAN connection to the remote router depending  
on IP address negotiation under PPP. Check with your system administrator for details on whether  
the router must communicate in numbered or unnumbered mode and what addresses are required.  
In unnumbered mode, neither IP address is defined on the link. In numbered mode, one IP address  
is defined on each end of the WAN link. These addresses may or may not belong to the same  
subnetwork. They may also be determined automatically, negotiated, or forced by the network  
administrator.  
The CSX400 automatically determines whether to run in unnumbered mode or numbered mode. If  
unnumbered mode negotiation fails, numbered mode is attempted using the Ethernet LAN IP  
address as a default. If you have specified a Source WAN IP address, unnumbered mode  
negotiation is not performed; i.e., the operating mode is numbered. If a Source WAN IP address is  
explicitly defined, the router will not, as a rule, accept another local address from the remote end.  
In numbered mode without an explicit Source WAN IP address, this address can be negotiated to a  
different value by the remote end.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
If the remote router supports unnumbered mode, neither address needs to be specified. Figure 6  
provides a simple example of an unnumbered mode configuration.  
WAN LINK  
CSX400  
REMOTE ROUTER  
NO SOURCE  
IP ADDRESS  
NO REMOTE  
IP ADDRESS  
Figure 6 CSX400 in Unnumbered Mode  
For numbered mode, consider the capabilities of the remote router as well as your requirements.  
Specify a Source WAN IP address if the CSX400 must be on the same subnetwork as the remote  
router. Figure 7 is an example of a Class B IP network (128.1).  
WAN LINK  
128.1.129.1  
255.255.255.0  
128.1.1.2  
255.255.255.0  
CSX400  
REMOTE ROUTER  
*SOURCE IP  
ADDRESS  
Figure 7 CSX400 in Numbered Mode on the Same Subnetwork as the Remote Router  
34 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Specify a Remote WAN IP Address if the remote router does not support IP address negotiation  
under PPP (i.e., does not have a pre-assigned IP address as shown in Figure 8).  
WAN LINK  
128.1.129.1  
255.255.255.0  
128.1.1.2  
255.255.255.0  
CSX400  
REMOTE ROUTER  
*SOURCE IP  
ADDRESS  
**REMOTE IP  
ADDRESS  
*SPECIFY SOURCE IP ADDRESS IF IT MUST BE ON SAME SUBNETWORK AS THE REMOTE ROUTER.  
**SPECIFY REMOTE IP ADDRESS IF REMOTE ROUTER DOES NOT HAVE A PRE-ASSIGNED IP ADDRESS.  
Figure 8 CSX400 to Remote Router Without a Pre-Assigned IP Address  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
NetWare IPX Routing — An Ethernet LAN IPX network number is required for the CSX400  
local Ethernet LAN connection. The ISDN WAN link to each remote router must have an assigned  
IPX network number. IPX Routes and IPX SAPs for each remote router are also required for the  
configuration process. Figure 9 provides an example of the network layout for IPX routing.  
NETWORK INFORMATION LAYOUT  
ETHERNET LAN  
IPX NETWORK NUMBER  
PC  
CSX400  
SYSTEM NAME  
PAP/CHAP PASSWORD  
WAN LINK  
ISDN LINE  
IPX NETWORK NUMBER  
SPIDs, DNs  
PHONE NUMBERS  
ISDN  
IPX ROUTES:  
WAN LINK  
NETWORK NUMBER  
IPX NETWORK NUMBER  
HOPS/TICKS  
IPX SAPs:  
REMOTE ISDN  
PHONE NUMBERS  
SERVER NAME TYPE  
NETWORK NUMBER  
NETWORK NODE ADDRESS  
SOCKETS  
REMOTE ROUTER  
ROUTER NAME  
PAP/CHAP PASSWORD  
SERVERS AND NETWORK SEGMENTS BEYOND  
THE REMOTE ROUTER  
Figure 9 Network Information Layout  
36 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
IPX Routes — If the CSX400 is to direct traffic to network segments and servers beyond the  
remote router, the routing table in the CSX400 can be “seeded” with static IPX routes. An IPX  
route includes a network number, hop count and ticks. The hop count is the number of routers  
through which traffic must pass to reach the remote network segment or server. Ticks represent  
how much time the packet takes to reach the destination in roughly 1/18th of a second increments.  
The CSX400 routing information table must be seeded statically so that it dials out to the  
appropriate remote router when IPX traffic is targeted to network segments or servers beyond that  
remote router. After the link is established, RIP update packets dynamically add to the routing  
information table in the CSX400. Seeding the routing table is not necessary when a CSX400 never  
dials out; it will discover routes beyond the calling router as soon as RIP updates arrive (provided  
the remote router supports RIP).  
IPX SAPs — If the CSX400 is to obtain services beyond the remote router, the CSX400 SAP  
services table must be seeded statically. A SAP service is identified by a server name and  
corresponding server type, network number, node number and socket. The socket number  
represents the service (application) within the server node.  
The CSX400 SAP services table must be seeded statically so that the device can direct traffic to the  
appropriate remote router when a service is requested from a server beyond that remote router.  
After the link is established, SAP broadcast packets dynamically add to the target router services  
table. Seeding the table is not necessary when a CSX400 never dials out; it will discover remote  
services beyond the calling router as soon as SAP broadcasts arrive (provided the remote router  
supports IPX).  
IPX Network Numbers — IPX network numbers are assigned to LAN network segments as well  
as servers. These numbers should be unique for all IPX networks on the Internetwork.  
IPX external network numbers refer to the physical LAN network segments to which servers and  
routers are connected. The WAN link network number is an external IPX network number. This is  
a unique number that you choose (or are given by the network administrator) to represent the WAN  
link between the CSX400 and remote router. The local Ethernet IPX network number is also an  
external network number.  
Servers are identified with internal network numbers. This is a logical network number that  
identifies the individual server. For a local router to access a server beyond the remote router, you  
specify a route using the internal network number of a server. To seed the routing table to access a  
network segment, you specify the external network number of the LAN segment. The network  
number in the SAP table is the internal network number of the server.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Node Numbers — Servers can have internal and external node numbers. The internal node  
number is a logical number assigned by the system administrator to the server. The external node  
number is the MAC address of the server. When adding SAP services to the SAP table, internal  
node numbers are used.  
Network Information Tables  
The following tables list the items you need to define or obtain to configure the router. This  
information is illustrated in the network information diagrams and described in the previous  
sections. Worksheets are provided in Chapter D, so that you can enter details about your CSX400  
and remote routers. Table 4 provides information for configuring your system settings, Table 5  
explains the Remote Router Database configuration settings and Table 6 details bridging and  
routing configuration.  
To configure the CSX400, you need to fill out one chart for the CSX400 and one  
Remote Router chart for each remote router to be entered into the remote router  
NOTE  
database. If you are setting up both ends of the network, you need a mirror image of  
the information listed below for configuring the router on the other end of the ISDN link.  
Table 4 Configuring System Settings  
Configuration Section  
System Settings  
Item  
Description  
Name used to identify this router; sent to  
other routers during PAP/CHAP security  
authentication and displayed in the  
Configuration Manager window.  
Router Name  
Message saved in the router to be read  
by a system administrator; displayed on  
the Configuration Manager main menu  
window.  
Message  
System Settings  
Dial Authentication  
Password  
This router’s password used for  
authentication when the router dials out  
to other routers or is challenged by them.  
Dial Authentication  
Password/Secret  
38 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Table 4 Configuring System Settings (Continued)  
Configuration Section  
Item  
Description  
ISDN Line Numbers  
(supplied by the service  
provider)  
SPIDs and Directory Numbers for one or  
two ISDN B-Channels  
NTT Nippon Telegraph/Telephone  
KDD Kokusai Denshin Denwa Co.  
NI-1 National ISDN 1  
System Settings  
ISDN Settings  
Type of Telco switch  
AT&T 5ESS w/Custom Software  
Northern Telecom DMS-100  
NET3 European ISDN  
NET3SW Swiss-Variant ISDN  
System Settings  
Ethernet IP Address and Address and Subnet Mask for Ethernet  
Ethernet IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
port Connection  
System Settings  
Ethernet IPX Network #  
Ethernet IPX Network  
Number  
Network Number for Ethernet port  
connection  
Table 5 Configuring the Remote Router Database  
Remote Router  
Configuration Database  
Item  
Description  
ISDN Phone Numbers for one or two  
ISDN B-Channels  
ISDN Line  
Disconnect Timer  
Maximum Links  
Disconnect link on inactivity timeout  
Maximum number of links for bandwidth  
on demand (1 or 2)  
Dial Settings  
Minimum Links  
Threshold  
Minimum links (0, 1, or 2)  
Percent Bandwidth utilization threshold  
Management on IN|OUT|BOTH  
Bandwidth Direction  
PAP|CHAP|NONE; minimum level of  
authentication required for the remote  
router.  
PAP|CHAP Security  
Procedure  
Dial-In Security  
Bridging On/Off  
The remote router’s password used for  
authentication when it dials the target  
router or is challenged by the target  
router.  
Password/Secret  
Bridging from/to the remote router is On  
or Off.  
Bridging On/Off  
Spanning Tree Protocol  
On or Off  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Table 5 Configuring the Remote Router Database (Continued)  
Remote Router  
Configuration Database  
Item  
Description  
IP Address, Subnet Mask of the remote  
network beyond the remote router;  
specifies metric for calculating route  
efficiency.  
IP Address, Subnet  
Mask, and Metric  
TCP/IP Route Addresses  
RemoteWAN IP Address IP Address and Subnet Mask of the  
a
and Subnet Mask  
Remote Router’s end of the WAN link.  
Source WAN IP Address IP Address and Subnet Mask of the local  
b
and Subnet Mask  
end of the WAN link.  
IPX Network Number, Hop Count and  
Ticks for stations/nodes beyond the  
IPX Routes: Network  
IPX Routes  
IPX SAPs  
Number, Hop Count and remote router. Hop count is number of  
Ticks  
routers to pass through and ticks is time  
delay (each 1/18th of a second).  
SAPs: Server Name,  
Server Type, Network  
Number, Node Number  
and Socket  
Information defining application services  
available on stations/nodes beyond the  
remote router.  
Network Number for the WAN link  
between target router and remote router  
WAN Network Number  
a. Used only in PPP numbered mode of addressing  
b. Used only in PPP numbered mode of addressing  
Make one chart for each remote router in the remote router database.  
NOTE  
40 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Table 6 Bridging and Routing Controls  
Bridging/Routing  
Configuration Database  
Item  
Description  
Destination dialed when bridging any  
outbound data traffic (required for  
outbound bridging)  
Remote Bridging  
Destination  
TCP/IP routing to all destinations On or  
Off  
Bridging/Routing  
TCP/IP Routing  
NetWare IPX Routing  
Internet Firewall  
IPX routing to all destination On or Off  
Internet Firewall active or not  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Sample Configuration  
A sample configuration of a hypothetical network is provided in this section. Figure 10 depicts a  
small office (FP2) accessing a central site (FP3) via an ISDN link. The small office also has access  
to Internet through an Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
The small office and central site have IP routing with a Class B addressing scheme and IPX  
routing. Bandwidth-on-demand is configured for accessing central site FP3. A maximum of one  
line is configured for calling the ISP (though two different phone numbers are defined for use).  
Table 7 provides sample system settings, Table 8 provides sample settings for the remote router at  
the FP3 site, Table 9 provides sample settings for the remote router at the ISP site and Table 10  
provides sample bridging and routing settings.  
OFFICE/HOME OFFICE  
SPID1 40855511111  
SPID2 40855511122  
128.1.129.3  
128.1.129.2  
128.1.129.1  
255.255.255.0  
DN1  
DN2  
5551111  
5551112  
FP2  
PAC BELL ISDN NETWORK  
2 B CHANNELS  
64000 BPS  
CSX400  
PC/CLIENT  
WORKSTATION/SERVER  
SPID1 40855511151  
SPID2 40855511162  
0.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255  
DN1  
DN2  
5551115  
5551116  
CSX400  
ISP  
FP3  
SPID1 40855511131  
SPID2 40855511142  
128.1.1.1  
255.255.255.0  
DN1  
DN2  
5551113  
5551114  
INTERNET  
128.1.1.3  
255.255.255.0  
128.1.1.2  
255.255.255.0  
WORKSTATION/SERVER  
WORKSTATION/SERVER  
PC/CLIENT  
BRIDGING APPLICATION  
Figure 10 Sample Network Diagram  
42 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
:
Table 7 CSX400 Sample Configuration Settings  
Configuration Section  
Item  
Setting  
System Settings  
Router Name  
Message  
FP2  
Configured_Mar_1996  
System Settings Dial  
Authentication Password  
Dial Authentication  
Password/Secret  
FP2passwd  
ISDN SPID#1  
40855511111  
40855511122  
DN1 5551111  
DN2 5551112  
ISDN SPID#2 ISDN  
Directory Number #1  
System Settings ISDN  
Settings  
ISDN Directory  
Number #2 ISDN  
Switch Type  
DMS-100  
128.1.129.1  
System Settings Ethernet  
IP Address  
Ethernet IP Address  
and Subnet Mask  
255.255.255.0  
123  
System Settings Ethernet  
IPX Network #  
Ethernet IPX Address:  
Network Number  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Table 8 Remote Router: FP3  
Configuration Section  
Item  
Setting  
5551113  
5551114  
60  
ISDN Phone #1  
ISDN Phone #2  
Disconnect Timer Value  
Maximum Links  
Minimum Links  
Threshold  
Remote Router  
Database  
2
Dial Settings  
0
75  
Bandwidth Direction  
BOTH  
Remote Router  
Database  
Minimum Authentication  
Remote Router’s  
NONE  
Password/Secret  
Dial-In Security  
Remote Router  
Database  
Bridging On/Off  
ON  
Spanning Tree Protocol  
OFF  
Bridging  
Remote Network’s IP  
Addresses, Subnet  
Masks, and Metrics  
128.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 1  
Remote Router  
Database  
Source WAN IP Address  
and Subnet Mask  
Not required  
Not required  
a
TCP/IP Route  
Addresses  
Remote WAN IP Address  
b
and Subnet Mask  
44 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Table 8 Remote Router: FP3 (Continued)  
Configuration Section  
Item  
Setting  
Remote Router  
Database  
IPX Address: Network  
Number, Hop Count and  
Ticks  
1001 1 4  
NetWare IPX Routes  
SAPs: Server Name,  
Server Type, Network  
Number, Node Number  
and Sockets  
Serv312_fp 4  
1001  
Remote Router  
Database  
NetWare IPX SAPs  
WAN Network Number  
00-00-00-00-00-01  
451 789  
a. Used only in PPP numbered mode of addressing  
b. Used only in PPP numbered mode of addressing  
Use one chart for each remote router in the remote router database.  
NOTE  
Table 9 Remote Router: ISP (Internet Service Provider)  
Configuration Section  
Item  
Setting  
5551115  
5551116  
Remote Router Database  
Dial Settings  
ISDN Phone #1  
ISDN Phone #2  
Disconnect Timer Value  
Maximum Links  
Minimum Links  
Threshold  
Default (60 seconds)  
Default (1)  
Default (0)  
Default (0)  
Bandwidth Direction  
Default (Both)  
PAP  
Remote Router Database  
Minimum Authentication  
Dial-In Security  
Remote Router’s Password/Secret  
ISPpasswd  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Table 9 Remote Router: ISP (Internet Service Provider) (Continued)  
Configuration Section  
Item  
Setting  
Remote RouterDatabase  
Bridging  
Bridging On/Off  
Spanning Tree Protocol  
Bridging OFF  
OFF  
Remote Router Database  
TCP/IP Routes  
Remote Network’s IP Addresses,  
Subnet Masks, and Metrics  
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1  
Source WAN IP Address and Subnet  
Mask  
Not required  
a
Remote WAN IP Address and  
Subnet Mask  
Not required  
Not required  
Not required  
b
Remote Router Database  
NetWare IPX Routes  
IPX Address: Network Number, Hop  
Count and Ticks  
SAPs: Server Name, Server Type,  
Network Number, Node Number  
and Sockets  
Remote Router Database  
NetWare IPX SAPs  
WAN Network Number  
Not required  
a. Used only in PPP numbered mode of addressing  
b. Used only in PPP numbered mode of addressing  
Use one chart for each remote router in the remote router database.  
NOTE  
46 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Table 10 Bridging and Routing Controls  
Configuration Section  
Bridging and Routing  
Item  
Setting  
FP3  
Default Remote  
Bridging Destination  
TCP/IP Routing On/Off  
ON  
ON  
NetWare IPX Routing  
On/Off  
Internet Firewall On/Off  
ON  
Names and Passwords Example  
In the sample configuration provided in Table 11, a small office FP2 communicates with a central  
site FP3 and an Internet Service Provider ISP. As indicated in this example, router FP2 has a  
system password “FP2passwd”. This password is used when FP2 dials out to site FP3 for  
authentication by that site, and at any time when FP3 challenges FP2. FP3 has a system password  
“FP3passwd” which is, likewise, used when FP3 dials out to site FP2 for authentication by FP2,  
and at any time FP2 challenges FP3. The ISP site has a system password “ISPpasswd” used for the  
same purpose.  
Each router includes the remote router password in the definition of any remote site to which it  
communicates. The router will use the remote password to authenticate the remote site when the  
remote router dials in or is challenged by the local site. For example, FP2 has remote router entries  
for FP3 and ISP, and defined in each entry are the respective remote router password.  
The following table shows the names and passwords for each router that must be defined for  
authentication to be performed correctly. (This assumes that all three systems use some form of  
authentication protocol.)  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Planning for CSX400 ISDN Configuration  
Table 11 Router Names and Passwords  
System Name: FP3 Router  
System Name: FP2 Router  
System Password  
FP3passwd  
System Password  
FP2passwd  
Remote Router Database  
Remote Router Database  
Remote Router FP2  
Remote’s Password  
FP2passwd  
Remote Router FP3  
Remote’s Password  
FP3passwd  
Remote Router ISP  
Remote’s Password  
ISPpasswd  
System Name: ISP Router  
System Password  
ISPpasswd  
Remote Router Database  
Remote Router FP2  
Remote’s Password  
FP2passwd  
48 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Ethernet Cabling Requirements  
This chapter contains general networking guidelines. Before attempting to install the CSX400 or  
any additional EPIMs or WPIMs, review the requirements and specifications outlined in this  
chapter.  
Your network installation must meet the conditions, guidelines, specifications, and  
requirements included in this chapter to ensure satisfactory performance of this  
NOTE  
equipment. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in poor network performance.  
Network Requirements  
Take care in planning and preparing the cabling and connections for your network. The quality of  
the connections, the length of cables, and other conditions of the installation play critical roles in  
determining the reliability of your network.  
This chapter contains general guidelines for the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
10BASE-T Twisted Pair Network  
Multimode Fiber Optic Network  
Single Mode Fiber Optic Network  
10BASE2 Coaxial Cable Network  
Transceiver Requirements  
Refer to the following sections that apply to your specific network configuration.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet Cabling Requirements  
10BASE-T Twisted Pair Network  
When connecting a 10BASE-T segment to either of the CSX400 Ethernet interfaces (Twisted Pair  
Ethernet Port Interface Module [EPIM-T]), ensure that the network meets the following  
requirements:  
Length — The IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T standard requires that 10BASE-T devices transmit over a  
100 meter (328 foot) link using 22–24 AWG unshielded twisted pair wire. However, cable quality  
largely determines maximum link length. If you use high quality, low attenuation cable, you can  
achieve link lengths of up to 200 meters. Cable delay limits the maximum link length to 200  
meters.  
Losses introduced by connections at punch-down blocks and other equipment reduce  
total segment length. For each connector or patch panel in the link, subtract 12 meters  
NOTE  
from the total length of the cable.  
Insertion Loss — Between frequencies of 5.0 and 10.0 MHz, the maximum insertion loss must  
not exceed 11.5 dB. This includes the attenuation of the cables, connectors, patch panels, and  
reflection losses due to impedance mismatches in the link segment.  
Impedance — Cabletron Systems 10BASE-T products work on twisted pair cable with  
75-to-165 ohms impedance. Unshielded twisted pair cables typically have an impedance of  
between 85 and 110 ohms. You can also use Shielded Twisted Pair cables, such as IBM Type 1  
cable, but this cable has an impedance of 150 ohms.  
Jitter — Intersymbol interference and reflections can cause jitter in the bit cell timing, resulting  
in data errors. 10BASE-T links must not generate more than 5.0 ns of jitter. Make sure the cable  
meets 10BASE-T link impedance requirements to rule out jitter as a concern.  
Delay — The maximum propagation delay of a 10BASE-T link segment must not exceed  
1000 ns. This 1000 ns maximum delay limits the maximum link segment length to no greater than  
200 meters.  
Crosstalk — Signal coupling between different cable pairs within a multi-pair cable bundle  
causes crosstalk. 10BASE-T transceiver design alleviates concerns about crosstalk, provided the  
cable meets all other requirements.  
50 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet Cabling Requirements  
Noise — Crosstalk, or externally induced impulses, can cause noise. Impulse noise may cause  
data errors if the impulses occur at very specific times during data transmission. Generally, noise is  
not a concern. If you suspect noise-related data errors, you may need to reroute the cable or  
eliminate the source of the impulse noise.  
Temperature — Multi-pair PVC 24 AWG telephone cables typically have an attenuation of  
approximately 8–10 dB/100 m at 20°C (68°F). The attenuation of PVC insulated cable varies  
significantly with temperature. At temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F), Cabletron Systems  
strongly recommends using plenum-rated cable to ensure attenuation remains within specification.  
Multimode Fiber Optic Network  
When connecting a multimode fiber optic link segment to the CSX400 (using an EPIM-F1/F2),  
ensure that the network meets the following requirements:  
Cable Type — Use the following multimode fiber optic media:  
•
•
•
50/125 µm fiber optic cabling  
62.5/125 µm fiber optic cabling  
100/140 µm fiber optic cabling  
Attenuation — Test the fiber optic cable with a fiber optic attenuation test set adjusted for an  
850 nm wavelength. This test verifies that the signal loss in a cable falls within the following  
acceptable levels:  
•
•
•
13.0 dB or less for a 50/125 µm fiber cable segment  
16.0 dB or less for a 62.5/125 µm fiber cable segment  
19.0 dB or less for a 100/140 µm fiber cable segment  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet Cabling Requirements  
Budget and Propagation Delay — When you determine the maximum fiber optic cable length  
to incorporate fiber runs into the network, calculate and consider the fiber optic budget (a total loss  
of 11.0 dB or less is permissible between stations) and total network propagation delay.  
To determine the fiber optic budget, combine the optical loss due to the fiber optic cable, in-line  
splices, and fiber optic connectors. Typical loss for a splice and connector (together) equals  
1 dB or less.  
Network propagation delay is the amount of time it takes a packet to travel from the sending  
device to the receiving device. Total propagation delay allowed for the entire network must not  
exceed 25.6 µs in one direction (51.2 µs round trip). If the total propagation delay between any  
two nodes on the network exceeds 25.6 µs, you must use bridges or switches.  
Length — The maximum possible multimode fiber optic cable length is 2 km (1.24 miles).  
However, IEEE 802.3 FOIRL specifies a maximum of 1 km (0.62 miles).  
Single Mode Fiber Optic Network  
When connecting a single mode fiber optic link segment to the CSX400 (using an EPIM-F3),  
ensure that the network meets the following requirements:  
Cable Type — Fiber optic link segments should consist of 8/125 or 12/125 µm single mode fiber  
optic cabling. You can also use 62.5/125 µm multimode cable with the EPIM-F3; however,  
multimode cable allows for greater optical loss, and limits the possible distance to 2 km.  
Attenuation — Test the fiber optic cable with a fiber optic attenuation test set adjusted for a  
1300 nm wavelength. This test verifies that the signal loss in a cable falls within the acceptable  
level of 10.0 dB or less for any given single mode fiber optic link.  
Budget and Propagation Delay — When you determine a maximum fiber optic cable length,  
you must calculate and consider the fiber optic budget (a total loss of 10.0 dB or less between  
stations) and total network propagation delay.  
To determine the fiber optic budget, combine the optical loss due to the fiber optic cable, in-line  
splices, and fiber optic connectors. Typical loss for a splice and connector (together) equals 1 dB  
or less.  
Network propagation delay is the amount of time it takes a packet to travel from the sending device  
to the receiving device. Total propagation delay for the entire network must not exceed 25.6 µs in  
one direction (51.2 µs round trip). If the total propagation delay exceeds 25.6 µs, you must use  
bridges or switches to re-time the signal.  
52 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet Cabling Requirements  
Length — If your network meets all system budgets, the maximum single mode fiber optic cable  
length can reach 5 km (3.1 miles) with bridges or switches at each segment end. The FOIRL  
specifies a maximum of 1 km (0.62 miles).  
10BASE2 Coaxial Cable Network  
When connecting a thin coaxial cable segment to the CSX400 (using an EPIM-C), ensure that your  
network meets the following requirements:  
Cable Type — Use only 50-ohm RG 58A/U type coaxial cable for thin coaxial cable segments.  
Length — The thin coaxial cable segment must not exceed 185 meters.  
Terminators — Terminate each end of a thin coaxial cable segment.  
Connectors — You can use up to 29 T-connectors throughout the length of the cable segment for  
host connections. Ensure that all connections are spaced 0.5 meters or more from one another or  
from terminators.  
If you use an excessive number of barrel connectors within the cable segment (e.g., finished wall  
plates with BNC feed-throughs), you may need to reduce the number of host connections. For  
special network design information, contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support.  
Grounding — For safety, ground only one end of a thin coaxial cable segment. Do NOT connect  
EPIM BNC ports to earth ground.  
Connecting a thin coaxial cable segment to earth ground at more than one point could  
produce dangerous ground currents.  
!
CAUTION  
Transceiver Requirements  
When you connect an external network segment to an EPIM-A in your CSX400 through a  
transceiver, that transceiver must meet IEEE 802.3 standards or Ethernet version 1.0 or 2.0  
requirements. The transceiver must also have SQE disabled.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet Cabling Requirements  
54 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Installation  
This chapter outlines the procedure for attaching the CSX400 to the network. Ensure that the  
network meets the guidelines and requirements outlined in Chapter 5, Ethernet Cabling  
Requirements, before installing the CSX400. To install the HSIM and WPIMs, you need the  
following items:  
•
•
Antistatic wrist strap (provided with the CSX400)  
Phillips screwdriver  
Unpacking the CSX400  
Unpack the CSX400 as follows:  
1. Remove the shipping material from the box and carefully remove the CSX400.  
2. Visually inspect the CSX400. If there are any signs of damage, contact Cabletron Systems  
(refer to the Getting Help section) immediately.  
3. Read the CSX400 Release Notes included in the shipping box.  
Guidelines for Installations  
Only qualified personnel should perform installation procedures.  
Do not connect EPIM ports to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).  
Hazardous voltages exist that may damage the CSX400.  
!
CAUTION  
Installation sites must be within reach of the network cabling and meet the requirements listed  
below:  
•
A properly grounded power receptacle must be within seven feet of the location.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
•
•
•
In a shelf installation, the shelf must be able to support 13.6 kg (30 lb) of static weight for each  
device on the shelf.  
Maintain a temperature of between 5°C (41°F) and 40°C (104°F) at the installation site with  
fluctuations of less than 10°C (50°F) per hour.  
Maintain a two-inch clearance for each side and the back of the device for adequate ventilation.  
Installing Interface Modules  
Depending on your specific application, install Cableton Systems WAN Port Interface Modules  
(WPIMs) and the CSX-COMP/ENCR modules into the CSX400 before proceeding with the  
installation of your CSX400. Refer to the Installing Ethernet Port Interface Modules (EPIMs),  
Installing WAN Port Interface Modules (WPIMs), and CSX-COMP/ENCR Installation  
sections within this chapter for installation instructions.  
The EPIMs and WPIMs, and CSXCOMP/ENCR for the CSX400 are sensitive to static  
discharges. Use a grounding strap and observe all static precautions during  
installation. Failure to do so could result in damage to the EPIMs, WPIMs, CSXCOMP/  
ENCR, and the CSX400.  
!
CAUTION  
The CSX400 must have at least one EPIM and one WPIM installed before you can  
begin configuring the device.  
NOTE  
Installing Ethernet Port Interface Modules (EPIMs)  
This section contains procedures for adding or replacing an Ethernet Port Interface Module  
(EPIM) to upgrade or change the capabilities of your CSX400. After installing your new EPIM,  
refer to Chapter 5, Ethernet Cabling Requirements, for network configuration guidelines.  
Appendix A, EPIM Specifications, provides specification information on Cabletron Systems  
EPIMs.  
Before performing installation procedures, ensure that the requirements outlined in the  
section, Guidelines for Installations, are met.  
!
CAUTION  
56  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
To install an EPIM, perform the following steps:  
When removing an existing EPIM, make sure to pull the module straight out to avoid  
damaging the connector.  
!
CAUTION  
1. Attach the disposable grounding strap to your wrist (refer to the instructions outlined on the  
disposable grounding strap package).  
2. Remove the coverplate or the existing EPIM (whichever applies).  
3. Slide your new EPIM into place, making sure the connectors on the rear of the module and  
inside the CSX400 attach properly as shown in Figure 11.  
4. Install the mounting screw.  
ETHERNET 1  
ETHERNET 2  
Mounting  
Screw  
EPIM  
Figure 11 Installing an EPIM  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Removing the CSX400 Cover  
This section describes how to remove the CSX400 chassis cover. The cover must be removed to  
install a WAN Port Interface Module.  
DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER FROM THE CSX400 WHILE POWER IS APPLIED  
TO THE UNIT.  
!
CAUTION  
DO NOT POWER UP THE DEVICE AGAIN UNTIL THE COVER AND SCREWS ARE  
IN PLACE.  
DECKEL VON DAS CSX400 NICHT ABZIEHEN UNTER SPANNUNG.  
CSX400 NICHEINSCHALTEN SO LANG DER DECKEL UND SCHRAUBEN NICHT  
EINGEBAUT SIND.  
NO DEBE DE REMOVER LA TAPA DURENTE QUE ESTE CONELTADO A LA  
CORRIENTE.  
NO ENCHUFE A LA CORRIENTE HASTA QUE LA TAPAY LOS TORNILLOS ESTEN  
EN SU LUGAR.  
To remove the chassis cover, proceed as follows:  
1. Disconnect the CSX400 from the network as follows:  
a. Unplug the power cord from the rear of the CSX400 chassis.  
Before performing step b, mark any cables connected to the CSX400 according to their  
associated port numbers. This is recommended for ease of reinstallation.  
TIP  
b. Disconnect all network cables attached to the CSX400.  
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the seven screws that attach the chassis cover to the unit.  
Place the screws aside. (See Figure 12).  
3. While facing the back of the unit, remove the chassis cover by pulling the cover toward you and  
then up.  
58  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
Removing the CSX400-DC Cover  
This section describes how to remove the CSX400-DC chassis cover. The cover must be removed  
to install a WAN Port Interface Module (WPIM).  
Do not remove the cover from the CSX400-DC while power is applied to the unit. Do  
not power up the device again until the cover and screws are in place.  
!
CAUTION  
To remove the chassis cover, proceed as follows:  
1. Disconnect the CSX400-DC from the network as follows:  
a. Flip the DC switch located in the back of the CSX400-DC to the “off” position.  
Before performing step b, mark any cables connected to the CSX400-DC according to  
their associated port numbers. This is recommended for ease of reinstallation.  
TIP  
b. Disconnect all network cables attached to the CSX400-DC.  
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the seven screws that attach the chassis cover to the unit.  
Place the screws aside. (See Figure 12).  
3. While facing the back of the unit, remove the chassis cover by pulling the cover toward you and  
then up.  
48/60Vdc ---  
2.2A/1.5A  
48/60Vdc ---  
2.2A/1.5A  
Removing the Cover Screws  
Lifting the Cover Off  
Figure 12 Removing the Chassis Cover  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
Installing WAN Port Interface Modules (WPIMs)  
Before performing installation procedures, ensure that the requirements outlined in the  
section, Guidelines for Installations, are met.  
!
CAUTION  
To install a WPIM into the CSX400, refer to Figure 13 and complete the following steps:  
When removing an existing WPIM, make sure to pull the module straight out to avoid  
damaging the connector.  
!
CAUTION  
1. Attach the disposable grounding strap to your wrist (refer to the instructions outlined on the  
disposable grounding strap package).  
2. Remove the CSX400 cover (refer to Removing the CSX400-DC Cover for instructions).  
3. Remove the blank faceplate from the appropriate WAN slot.  
4. Orient the WPIM as shown in Figure 13.  
5. Carefully insert the WPIM connector into the WPIM connector pins on the CSX400.  
6. Press down firmly on the WPIM until the pins slide all the way into the connector. Ensure that  
the WPIM seats flush on the standoffs.  
7. Secure the WPIM to the three standoffs using the provided screws.  
8. Replace the CSX400 cover.  
60  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
WPIM Screws  
WPIM  
Connector  
WPIM  
WPIM  
Connector Pins  
Standoffs  
Figure 13 Installing WPIMs  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
CSX-COMP/ENCR Installation  
This section contains instructions on how to install the CSX-COMP/ENCR into the CSX400  
motherboard. To help eliminate any potential problems during or after installation, read and  
understand all of the following steps:  
1. Attach one end of the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and the other end to an approved  
electrical ground.  
2. Unpack the CSX-COMP/ENCR by carefully removing it from the shipping box and then from  
the protective plastic bag. Do not cut the bag as the device could be damaged. If there are any  
signs of damage, contact the Cabletron Systems Global Call Center (refer to the Getting Help  
section).  
3. Power down the CSX400 before you install the CSX-COMP/ENCR.  
4. Remove the chassis cover of the CSX400 or CSX400-DC to install the CSX-COMP/ENCR  
(refer to Removing the CSX400 Cover, on page 58 or Removing the CSX400-DC Cover, on  
page 59).  
The motherboard of the CSX400 has two D-Type connectors. Use the left-most  
connector (as you are facing the front of the chassis). Ensure the CSX-COMP/ENCR  
NOTE  
is aligned such that its connector pins correctly align with the D-Type connector on the  
chassis or module.  
5. Locate the D-Type connector and the standoffs on the CSX400 (refer to Figure 14).  
6. The D-Type connector pins of the CSX-COMP/ENCR only fit one way onto the CSX400  
D-Type connector. Lower the CSX-COMP/ENCR onto the standoffs and align the connector  
with the connector pins. Carefully insert the connector pins of the CSX-COMP/ENCR into the  
CSX400 connector.  
7. Press down firmly on the CSX-COMP/ENCR until the pins fit all the way into the connector.  
8. Secure the CSX-COMP/ENCR with the standoff screws supplied with the CSX-COMP/ENCR.  
The CSX-COMP/ENCR installation is complete.  
62  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Standoff Screws  
D-Type  
Connector Pins  
D-Type  
Connector  
CSX-COMP/ENCR  
Standoff  
Detail  
2204N01  
Figure 14 CSX-COMP/ENCR  
Installing the CSX400  
The CSX400 may be installed on a tabletop, shelf or in a 19-inch rack.  
Refer to Tabletop and Shelf Installations for information concerning a tabletop or shelf  
installation. CSX400 and CSX400-DC Rackmount Installation describes the rackmount  
installation.  
Tabletop and Shelf Installations  
The following two subsections provide guidelines for installation on a tabletop or shelf.  
Before performing installation procedures, ensure that the requirements outlined in the  
section, Guidelines for Installations, are met.  
!
CAUTION  
To install the CSX400 on a tabletop or shelf, locate the CSX400 within seven feet of its power  
source with an unrestricted free surface area as shown in Figure 15, and complete the following  
steps:  
1. Locate the six round rubber feet included with your CSX400.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
2. Peel the paper backing off the round rubber feet, and adhere them to the bottom of the CSX400.  
Place one rubber foot near each of the four corners of the CSX400, and evenly space the  
remaining two near the center.  
21 IN.  
18 IN.  
16 IN.  
Figure 15 Tabletop or Shelf Installation  
Continue the installation by connecting power as described in Connecting the CSX400-DC to the  
Power Source.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC Rackmount Installation  
There are two methods of attaching the rackmount brackets, included with the CSX400 and  
CSX400-DC, that are discussed in this section. Attaching the Rackmount Brackets to the  
CSX400 discusses a typical installation of the CSX400, and Bonding the Rackmount Brackets  
to the CSX400-DC discusses the GR-1089-CORE Section 9 bonding requirements for the  
CSX400-DC when installing rackmount brackets. Refer to the procedure that applies to your  
installation.  
Before installing the CSX400 or CSX400-DC into a rack, ensure that the rack supports  
WARNING  
the device(s) without compromising the stability of the rack. Otherwise, personal injury  
and/or equipment damage may result.  
Rackmounting the CSX400 requires the following steps:  
•
•
•
Attaching the rackmount brackets  
Installing the CSX400 in a 19-inch rack  
Connecting the CSX400 to a power source  
Tools Required  
•
Phillips screwdriver  
64  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
Materials Required  
The following parts are included with the CSX400:  
•
•
Left (P/N 8501242-01) and right (P/N 8501241-01) rackmount brackets (Figure 16).  
6-32 x 1/4 inch flat-head screws (4)  
Do not use screws other than those supplied with the CSX400 to perform the following  
procedures.  
!
CAUTION  
Rackmount Brackets (2)  
Figure 16 CSX400 and CSX400-DC Rackmount Hardware  
Attaching the Rackmount Brackets to the CSX400  
Refer to Figure 17 and proceed as follows to attach the rackmount brackets:  
1. Remove and save the four 6-32 x 1/4 inch flat-head screws that are located along the front edges  
of each side of the CSX400.  
2. Locate the two rackmount brackets from the package included with your CSX400.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
3. Using the four 6-32 x 1/4 inch flat-head screws, attach the rackmount brackets to the sides of  
the CSX400 as shown in Figure 17.  
Rackmount  
Brackets (2)  
Screws (4)  
2012_09  
Figure 17 Installing the Rackmount Brackets  
4. Position the CSX400 between the vertical frame members of the 19-inch rack.  
5. Fasten the CSX400 with mounting screws as shown in Figure 19.  
Bonding the Rackmount Brackets to the CSX400-DC  
If the CSX400-DC is going to be mounted in a rack and needs to meet the GR-1089-CORE  
Section 9 bonding requirements, use the following instructions to install it into a 19-inch rack.  
1. Remove and discard the four cover screws (two from each side) located along the front edges  
of each side of the CSX400-DC.  
2. Remove the paint from around the area near the mounting holes on the left and right side of the  
cover of the CSX400-DC. See Figure 18.  
3. Apply a thin layer of anti-oxidant to the surface where the paint was removed.  
66  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
4. Locate the four 6-32 x 3/8-inch flathead cover replacement screws in the rackmount kit. Use  
these screws to attach the rackmount brackets to the CSX400-DC as shown in Figure 18.  
Rackmount Brackets (2)  
Remove Paint  
Figure 18 Installing the Rackmount Brackets  
5. Position the CSX400 between the vertical frame members of the 19-inch rack.  
6. Fasten the CSX400-DC with thread-forming screws as shown in Figure 19.  
19-Inch Rack  
Screws (4)  
2012_10  
Figure 19 Installing the CSX400 and CSX400-DC in a Rack  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
Connecting the CSX400 to the Power Source  
The CSX400 has a universal power supply. This allows you to connect the CSX400 to  
power sources of 100–125 and 200–240 Vac, 50/60 Hz.  
NOTE  
To connect the CSX400 to the power source, perform the following steps:  
1. Plug the power cord into the back panel of the CSX400.  
2. Plug the other end of the power cord into a grounded wall outlet.  
3. Verify that the PWR LED is on, indicating that the CSX400 is receiving power. After the  
CSX400 runs a self test, the CPU LED blinks green indicating normal operation. If the LED  
remains red, the processor is faulty; contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support (refer to  
Getting Help in Chapter 1.)  
4. Proceed to Chapter 7 to configure the CSX400.  
68  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Connecting the CSX400-DC to the Power Source  
Th CSX400-DC requires either a 48 Vdc or 60 Vdc (48/60 Vdc), 3.5 A (maximum), external power  
source supplied by three 18 AWG (American Wire Gauge) copper wires. These wires must be  
terminated to the dc input power strip shown in Figure 20 with either ring or spade terminals. The  
dc power supply in the CSX400-DC has its own on/off switch and is rated at 100 watts. To connect  
the CSX400-DC to a 48/60 Vdc power source, face the back panel, then refer to Figure 20 and  
proceed as follows:  
ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONEL SHOULD PERFORM THESE INSTALLATION  
PROCEDURES.  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ENERGY HAZARDS:  
•
•
CONNECT TO A RELIABLY GROUNDED 48/60 VDC SELV SOURCE.  
ENSURE THE BRANCH CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION IS  
RATED AT A MIMINUM OF 10 A.  
•
•
USE 18 AWG SOLID COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.  
ENSURE THAT A READILY ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT DEVICE THAT IS  
SUITABLY APPROVED AND RATED, IS INCORPORATED IN THE FIELD  
WIRING.  
TO BE INSTALLED IN A RESTRICTED ACCESS AREA IN ACCORDANCE WITH  
THE NEC OR THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
DC Input Power Strip  
ON/OFF  
+
48 or 60 Vdc  
Power Source  
–
Earth  
Ground  
Figure 20 48/60 Vdc Power Supply Connections  
To prevent injury or damage to the equipment, remove power from the 48/60 Vdc  
power source before proceeding with the following steps:  
1. Connect the ground  
terminal of the dc input power strip to an appropriate earth ground  
(green wire from power supply).  
2. Refer to Figure 20 for the proper connections to a 48/60 Vdc power source. Then connect the  
output leads of the 48/60 Vdc power source being used to the labeled negative (-) and positive  
(+) terminals on the dc input power strip.  
3. Restore power to the 48/60 Vdc power sources.  
4. Press the on/off power switch on.  
The CSX400 sounds an audible alarm if there is a polarity reversal. If the alarm  
sounds, turn off the 48/60 Vdc power source to that power supply. Then reverse the  
NOTE  
positive and negative leads to the dc input power strip of that power supply. Restore  
power from the 48/60 Vdc power source. Press the on/off switch to on. If the alarm  
sounds again, press the power switch to off and call Cabletron Systems. Refer to  
Getting Help.  
70  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for configuring the CSX400 using QuickSET.  
\
Before configuring the device, you must set up your computer based on the READ ME  
FIRST! documentation included with the product and installed the CSX400 using the  
NOTE  
QuickSTART Guide located in the QuickSET CD case.  
Normally, QuickSET automatically establishes a communication link with the CSX400 being  
configured. However, under certain circumstances, QuickSET may not be able to locate the  
CSX400 automatically. In this case, the IP Address window shown in Figure 21 displays:  
Figure 21 IP Address Window  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Enter the IP address of the CSX400 in the appropriate field and the password if applicable (the  
default password is public). Click on the OK button and QuickSET locates the CSX400 on the  
network and displays the First Introductory window shown in Figure 22.  
The QuickSET version number shown on each window in this chapter may not reflect  
the QuickSET version number running on your system.  
NOTE  
Figure 22 First Introductory Window  
Click on the Next>> button to continue the CSX400 configuration, and the Second Introductory  
window shown in Figure 23 displays.  
72  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Figure 23 The Second Introductory Window  
Click on the Next>> button and go to the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window to continue the  
CSX400 configuration.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Ethernet Configuration  
This section explains how to configure the CSX400 Ethernet 1 and 2 fields using QuickSET.  
Ethernet 1 and 2 Configuration Window  
The Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window, shown in Figure 24, displays after clicking on the  
Next>> button in the Second Introductory window. The Local Ethernet IP address and Subnet  
Mask fields shown on the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window are used for setting an IP address  
and Subnet Mask.  
Figure 24 Ethernet 1 and 2 Configuration Window  
74  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
This section describes each of the fields on the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window.  
Local Ethernet 1 IP Address — Displays the IP address for Ethernet interface 1. Place the  
cursor in this field and type the preferred IP address in Dotted Decimal Notation (DDN) format.  
The IP address must be entered in this field to continue.  
Local Ethernet 1 Subnet Mask — The Subnet Mask takes the same form as an IP address; four  
groups of three decimal digits, separated by periods. Each group must be in the numerical range of  
0 to 255. The first time you use QuickSET, the Subnet Mask field displays a default Subnet Mask,  
based on the IP address entered, when it is clicked on. If you wish to use a different Subnet Mask,  
enter it at this time in DDN format. A Subnet Mask must be entered in this field to continue.  
Local Ethernet 2 IP Address — Displays the IP address for Ethernet interface 2. Place the  
cursor in this field and type in the preferred IP address in DDN format.  
Local Ethernet 2 Subnet Mask — Displays the Subnet Mask for Ethernet interface 2. Place the  
cursor in this field and type in the Subnet Mask in DDN format. The first time you use QuickSET,  
the Subnet Mask field displays a default Subnet Mask, based on the IP address entered, when it is  
clicked on. If you wish to use a different Subnet Mask, enter it at this time, and type the Subnet  
Mask in DDN format. A Subnet Mask must be entered in this field to continue if an IP address is  
entered for the Local Ethernet 2 interface.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Secondary IPs — The Secondary IPs window shown in Figure 25 displays after clicking on the  
Secondary IPs... button, and shows the list of current Secondary IP addresses. The CSX400 can  
support multiple IP Subnets, therefore, there can be multiple Secondary IP Addresses assigned to  
an Ethernet interface. To add a Secondary IP address, click on the Add IP button and enter the IP  
Address, and Subnet Mask in their corresponding fields.  
When you have finished making changes, click on the Apply Changes button. Click on the Done  
button when you are finished.  
Figure 25 Secondary IPs Window  
76  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
System Passwords — The System Passwords window shown in Figure 26 displays after  
clicking on the Passwords button in the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window. The system  
passwords used by QuickSET are the same as the Community Names of the device that are used in  
Local Management through a TELNET application. System passwords allow you to control  
management access by establishing three passwords. Each password controls varying levels of  
access to the CSX400 management.  
Once passwords are assigned, you must use the SuperUser System password at the User Password  
prompt when initiating a QuickSET session. If you are configuring the CSX400 for the first time or  
if no passwords are assigned, the default System password for each access level is preset to public.  
Figure 26 System Passwords Window  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
The following definitions explain the fields in the System Passwords window shown in Figure 26.  
Read Only Access — This access level allows reading of device parameters not including  
system passwords. Place the cursor in this field and type the new system password. Retype the  
system password in the Confirm Password field below the Read Only Access field.  
Read/Write Access — This access level allows editing of some device configuration parameters  
not including changing system passwords. Place the cursor in this field and type the new system  
password. Retype the system password in the Confirm Password field below the Read/Write  
Access field.  
QuickSET (SuperUser) — This access level allows full management privileges. Place the cursor  
in this field and type the new system password. Retype the system password in the Confirm  
Password field below the QuickSET (SuperUser) field.  
If you edit the SuperUser system password, be certain not to forget it. If you do, you  
cannot perform management functions without returning the device to its factory default  
configuration. This effectively erases any configuration work you may have done.  
!
CAUTION  
When finished configuring the CSX400 system passwords, click on the OK button in the System  
Passwords window to return to the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window.  
Once your Ethernet configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button and go to the Wide  
Area 1 and 2 Configuration section.  
78  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Wide Area 1 and 2 Configuration  
When configuring WAN interfaces 1 and 2 with QuickSET, the Wide Area configuration  
window that displays corresponds to the specific WPIM that is installed into the  
CSX400.  
NOTE  
Configuration for the Wide Area 2 interface is the same as the configuration for the  
Wide Area 1 interface.  
NOTE  
Both Wide Area 1 and Wide Area 2 slots must be populated to initiate Wide Area  
interface 2 configuration.  
Refer to the appropriate section listed below to configure your Wide Area 1 or 2 interface on the  
CSX400:  
Wide Area T1 Configuration Window  
Wide Area E1 Configuration Window  
Wide Area DI Configuration Window  
Wide Area Synchronous Configuration Window  
Wide Area DDS Configuration Window  
Wide Area HDSL Configuration Window  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Wide Area T1 Configuration Window  
The Wide Area T1 configuration window shown in Figure 27 displays after clicking on the  
Next>> button in either the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window or the Wide Area Frame Relay  
Time Slot and PPP configuration windows, depending on whether you have installed one or two  
WPIMs in the CSX400, and in what order you are configuring them.  
Figure 27 Wide Area T1 Configuration Window  
80  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
This section explains how to configure the CSX400 Wide Area T1 interface using QuickSET.  
The service provider (i.e., AT&T, Sprint, MCI, etc.) determines the settings for many of  
the following fields. Consult the service provider for the correct settings.  
NOTE  
The line configuration information shown in Table 12 must be supplied by your service provider.  
The CSX400 factory default settings are in bold.  
Table 12 Telco Configuration Information  
Configuration Information  
Required by User  
Configuration Information  
Supplied by Service Provider  
T1 Frame Type  
ESF or D4  
T1 Line BuildOut  
0 dB, -7.5 dB, -15 dB  
B8ZS or AMI  
T1 Line Coding  
T1 Loop-Back  
No Loop or Line Loop  
Loop-Timing or Local-Timing  
Time Slot (1-24) Assignments  
T1 Transmit Clock Source  
Time Slots (for Fractional T1)  
The following definitions explain the fields in the T1 WAN configuration window.  
T1 Frame Type — Displays the T1 frame type. The selections are ESF (Extended Superframe)  
and D4 (AT&T D4). The default setting for this field is ESF.  
T1 Line BuildOut — Displays the signal level for the physical T1 line. Set this to 0 dB unless the  
service provider recommends another setting. The default setting for this field is 0 dB. The  
following options are available for this setting:  
•
•
•
0 dB  
-7.5 dB  
-15 dB  
T1 Line Coding — Displays the line coding for the physical T1 line. The selections for this field  
are B8ZS and AMI. The default setting for this field is B8ZS.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
T1 Loop-Back — Network Loopback is a testing procedure that segments the line and allows you  
to isolate faults. The selections for this field are No Loop and Line Loop. In Line Loop all 24  
channels are looped back to the T1 line. The CyberSWITCH must be in Loop-Timing mode to use  
this option. The default setting is No Loop.  
T1 Transmit Clock Source — Displays the T1 Transmit Clock Source. The choices for this field  
are Loop-Timing (Extracted Line Data) and Local-Timing (Internal Clock). The default setting for  
this field is Loop-Timing.  
Protocol — Displays the active protocol for the Wide Area T1 interface. The selections for this  
field are either Frame Relay or Point-to-Point (PPP). The default setting for this field is PPP.  
Link Management Protocol — If Frame Relay is the selected protocol, this field displays Q.933  
Annex A and T1.617 Annex D. The default for Frame Relay is T1.617 Annex D. This field is  
grayed out and not used for PPP.  
Once the Wide Area T1 configuration is complete, click on Next>>, and go to the Wide Area  
Frame Relay Time Slot Configuration Window or Wide Area PPP Time Slot Configuration  
Window section, depending on which protocol you are using.  
82  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Wide Area E1 Configuration Window  
The Wide Area (E1) configuration window shown in Figure 28 displays after clicking on the  
Next>> button in either the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window or the Wide Area Frame Relay  
Time Slot and PPP configuration windows, depending on whether you have installed one or two  
WPIMs in the CSX400, and what order you are configuring them.  
This section explains how to configure the CSX400 E1 WAN interface using QuickSET.  
Figure 28 Wide Area E1 Configuration Window  
The service provider determines the settings for the following fields. Consult the  
service provider for the correct settings.  
NOTE  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
The line configuration information shown in Table 13 must be supplied by your service provider.  
The CyberSWITCH factory default settings are in bold type.  
Table 13 Telco Configuration Information  
Configuration Information  
Required by User  
Configuration Information  
Supplied by Service Provider  
E1 Frame Type  
E1 or E1-CRC  
E1 Line Coding  
HDB3 or AMI  
E1 Loop-Back  
No Loop or Line Loop  
Loop-Timing or Local-Timing  
Time Slot (1-32) Assignments  
E1 Transmit Clock Source  
Time Slots (for Fractional E1)  
The following definitions explain the fields in the Wide Area E1 configuration window.  
E1 Frame Type — Displays the E1 frame type. The selection toggles between E1 and E1-CRC.  
The default setting for this field is E1.  
E1 Line Coding — Displays the line coding for the physical E1 line. The selections toggle  
between HDB3 and AMI. The default setting for this field is HDB3.  
E1 Loop-Back — Network Loopback is a testing procedure that segments the line and allows  
you to isolate faults. Click on the radio button to select either the No Loop or Line Loop option. In  
Line Loop, all 32 channels are looped back to the E1 line. The CyberSWITCH must be in  
Loop-Timing mode to use this option. The default setting is No Loop.  
E1 Transmit Clock Source — Displays the E1 Transmit Clock Source. Click on the radio button  
to select either the Loop-Timing (Extracted Line Data) or Local-Timing (Internal Clock) option.  
The default setting for this field is Loop-Timing.  
Protocol — Displays the active protocol for the E1 WAN port. The selections for this field are  
either Frame Relay or PPP. The default setting for this field is PPP.  
Link Management Protocol — If Frame Relay is the selected protocol, this field displays Q.933  
Annex A and T1.617 Annex D. The default for Frame Relay is T1.617 Annex D. This field is  
grayed out and not used for PPP.  
84  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Once the E1 WAN configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button and go to the Wide Area  
Frame Relay Time Slot Configuration Window or Wide Area PPP Time Slot Configuration  
Window section, depending on which protocol you are using.  
Wide Area DI Configuration Window  
The Wide Area (DI) configuration window shown in Figure 29 displays after clicking on the  
Next>> button in the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window or the Wide Area Frame Relay Time  
Slot and PPP configuration windows, depending on whether you have installed one or two WPIMs  
in the CSX400, and in what order you are configuring them.  
This section explains how to configure the CSX400 Wide Area DI interface using QuickSET.  
Figure 29 Wide Area DI Configuration Window  
The service provider (i.e., AT&T, Sprint, MCI, etc.) determines the settings for the  
following fields. Consult the service provider for the correct settings.  
NOTE  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
The line configuration information shown in Table 14 must be supplied by your service provider.  
The CyberSWITCH factory default settings are in bold.  
Table 14 Telco Configuration Information  
Configuration Information  
Required by User  
Configuration Information  
Supplied by Service Provider  
T1 Frame Type  
ESF or D4  
T1 Line BuildOut  
0dB, -7.5 dB, -15 dB  
B8ZS or AMI  
T1 Line Coding  
T1 Loop-Back  
No Loop or Line Loop  
Loop-Timing or Local-Timing  
Time Slot (1-24) Assignments  
T1 Transmit Clock Source  
Time Slots (for Fractional T1)  
The WPIM-DI has two connectors allowing two devices to share the available Time Slots in a T1  
WAN link. The Network Interface (NI) is the main connection to the WAN link while the  
Drop-and-Insert (DI) interface is used by other T1 equipment to share the main T1 link.  
The following definitions explain the fields in the DI WAN configuration window.  
DI Functionality — Displays the status of the Drop-and-Insert function. Click on the Enable  
radio button to enable the Drop-and-Insert function, that allows any Time Slots set to 0 in the Wide  
Area Frame Relay Time Slot and PPP configuration windows to be used by the Drop-and-Insert  
port interface.  
T1 Frame Type — Displays the DI frame type. Click on the radio button to select either the ESF  
or D4 option. The default setting for this field is ESF.  
86  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
T1 Line BuildOut — Displays the signal level for the physical DI line. Set this to 0 dB unless the  
service provider recommends another setting. The default setting for this field is 0 dB. Click on the  
appropriate radio button for the following levels:  
•
•
•
0 (Zero) dB  
-7.5 dB  
-15 dB  
T1 Line Coding — Displays the line coding for the physical DI line. The selections toggle  
between B8ZS and AMI. The default setting for this field is B8ZS.  
T1 Loop-Back — Network Loopback is a testing procedure that segments the line and allows you  
to isolate faults. The selections for this field toggle between No Loop and Line Loop. In Line Loop  
all 24 channels are looped back to the DI line. The CyberSWITCH must be in Loop-Timing mode  
to use this option. The default setting is No Loop.  
T1 Transmit Clock Source — Displays the DI Transmit Clock Source. Click on the radio button  
to select either the Loop-Timing (Extracted Line Data) or Local-Timing (Internal Clock) option.  
The default setting for this field is Loop-Timing.  
Protocol — Displays the active protocol for the Wide Area DI interface. The selections for this  
field are Frame Relay and PPP. The default setting for this field is PPP.  
Link Management Protocol — If Frame Relay is the selected protocol, this field displays Q.933  
Annex A and T1.617 Annex D. The default for Frame Relay is T1.617 Annex D. This field is  
grayed out and not used for PPP.  
Once the Wide Area DI configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button, and go to the Wide  
Area Frame Relay Time Slot Configuration Window or the Wide Area PPP Time Slot  
Configuration Window section, depending on which protocol you are using.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Wide Area Synchronous Configuration Window  
The Wide Area Synchronous configuration window shown in Figure 30 displays after clicking on  
the Next>> button in either the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window or the Wide Area Frame  
Relay Time Slot and PPP configuration windows, depending on whether you have installed one or  
two WPIMs in the CSX400, and in what order you are configuring them.  
This section explains how to configure the CSX400 Synchronous WAN port using QuickSET.  
Figure 30 Wide Area Synchronous Configuration Window  
The service provider (i.e., AT&T, Sprint, MCI, etc.) determines the settings for the  
following fields. Consult the service provider for the correct settings.  
NOTE  
88  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
The line configuration information shown in Table 15 is determined by your service provider. The  
CSX400 factory default settings are in bold.  
Table 15 Telco Configuration Information  
Configuration  
Configuration Information  
Information Required by  
Supplied by Service Provider  
User  
Sync Port Type  
V.35, RS422, RS232 or X.21  
Force CTS on or off  
Force DSR on or off  
64000  
Sync Flow Control  
Sync Clock Speed  
The following definitions explain the fields in the Synchronous WAN configuration window.  
Sync Port Type — Displays the Synchronous port electrical interface type. The selections for  
this field are V.35, RS422, RS232, and X.21. The default setting for this field is V.35. Table 16  
explains the options for the Sync Port Type.  
Table 16 Sync Port Types  
Interface  
Type  
Cabletron  
Part Number  
Sync Port Type  
Cable Type  
RS422  
RS232  
V.35  
RS449  
RS449  
RS232  
V.35  
9380120  
9380122  
9380121  
9380123  
9380124  
9380126  
9380125  
RS232  
V.35  
X.21  
X.21  
X.21  
RS422  
RS422  
RS422  
RS422  
RS530  
RS530  
RS530A  
RS530 Alt A  
RS530A  
RS530 Alt A  
RS530A Alt A  
RS530A Alt A 9380127  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Sync Clock Speed — Displays your configured receive clock speed. The default setting for this  
field is 64000 bits per second. The information necessary for you to set this field is normally  
determined by the service provider. Select the down arrow button to make your selection from the  
list of clock speeds using the information provided by your service provider (if it is not listed, type  
the value in).  
Sync Flow Control — Displays the source of the Clear To Send (CTS) and the Force Data Set  
Ready (DSR) signals.  
The CTS signal is an input to the CSX400. The CSX400 can either use or ignore the CTS signal.  
Clicking on the box indicates that the CSX400 ignores the CTS signal from an external DCE (Data  
Communications Equipment) and forces the signal high. The off setting indicates that the CTS  
signal is received from an external DCE. The default setting is off.  
The DSR signal is an input to the CSX400. Clicking on the box indicates that DSR signal is  
internally forced high. The off setting indicates that the DSR signal is received from an external  
DCE. The default setting is off.  
Protocol — Displays the active protocol for the Wide Area Sync port. The selections for this field  
are either Frame Relay and PPP. The default setting for this field is PPP.  
Link Management Protocol — If Frame Relay is the selected protocol, this field displays Q.933  
Annex A and T1.617 Annex D. The default for Frame Relay is T1.617 Annex D. This field is  
grayed out and not used for PPP.  
Once the Wide Area Synchronous configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button, and go to  
the Bridging and Routing Configuration section of this guide.  
90  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Wide Area DDS Configuration Window  
The Wide Area DDS configuration window shown in Figure 31 displays after clicking on the  
Next>> button in the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window or the Wide Area Frame Relay Time  
Slot and PPP configuration windows, depending on whether you have installed one or two WPIMs  
in the CSX400, and the order in which you are configuring them.  
This section explains how to configure the CSX400 Wide Area DDS interface using QuickSET.  
Figure 31 Wide Area DDS Configuration Window  
The service provider (i.e., AT&T, Sprint, MCI, etc.) determines the settings for  
Table 17. Consult the service provider for the correct settings.  
NOTE  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Table 17 shows the line configuration information normally determined by your service provider.  
The CSX400 factory default settings are in bold.  
Table 17 Telco Configuration Information  
Configuration Information  
Required by User  
Configuration Information  
Supplied by Service Provider  
DDS Line Mode  
DDS Clock Source  
DDS Loop Back  
DDS-PRI or DDS-CC  
Loop-Timing or Local-Timing  
No Loop or Line Loop  
This section describes the fields in the Wide Area DDS configuration window.  
DDS Line Mode — Displays the DDS Line Mode. The selections for this field are DDS-PRI 56K  
(primary) and DDS-CC 64K (clear channel). This information is determined by the service  
provider. The default setting is DDS-PRI.  
DDS Clock Source — Displays the DDS clock source. The selections for this field are either  
Loop-Timing or Local-Timing. The Loop-Timing setting allows the CSX400 to receive its timing  
information from the service provider. The Local-Timing setting allows the CSX400 to generate  
its timing information internally. If DDS-CC 64K was chosen for the DDS Line Mode then this  
field must be set to Loop-Timing. The default setting for this field is Loop-Timing.  
DDS Loop Back — Displays the internal loopback as either Line Loop or No Loop. Line Loop is  
reserved for network diagnostics only. The default setting is No Loop.  
Protocol — Displays the active protocol for the DDS WAN port. The selections for this field are  
Frame Relay or PPP. The default setting for this field is PPP.  
Link Management Protocol — If Frame Relay is the selected protocol, this field displays Q.933  
Annex A and T1.617 Annex D. The default for Frame Relay is T1.617 Annex D. This field is  
grayed out and not used for PPP.  
Once the Wide Area DDS configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button, and go to the  
Bridging and Routing Configuration section of this guide  
92  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Wide Area HDSL Configuration Window  
The Wide Area HDSL configuration window shown in Figure 32 displays after clicking on the  
Next>> button in the Ethernet 1 and 2 configuration window or the PPP-HDSL configuration  
window.  
This section explains how to configure the CSX400 Wide Area HDSL interface using QuickSET.  
Figure 32 Wide Area HDSL Configuration Window  
The wiring provider (i.e., Internet Service Provider (ISP) contractor, etc.) determines  
the settings for Table 18. Consult the service provider for the correct settings.  
NOTE  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Table 18 shows the line configuration information normally determined by your wiring provider.  
The CSX400 factory default setting is in bold.  
Table 18 Telco Configuration Information  
Configuration Information  
Required by User  
Configuration Information  
Supplied by Service Provider  
HDSL Transmit Clock Source  
Slave or Master  
This section describes the fields in the Wide Area HDSL configuration window.  
HDSL Transmit Clock Source — Displays the HDSL Transmit Clock Source. Click on the radio  
button to select either the Slave or Master option. The default setting is Slave.  
Protocol — Displays the active protocol for the HDSL WAN port. The selections for this field are  
either HDLC or Point-to-Point (PPP). The default setting for this field is PPP.  
Once the Wide Area HDSL configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button, and go to the  
Wide Area HDSL Time Slot Configuration Window section.  
94  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Wide Area Frame Relay Time Slot Configuration Window  
The Wide Area Frame Relay Time Slot configuration window shown in Figure 33 displays when  
you click on the Next>> button in the Wide Area T1, E1, or DI configuration windows when  
Frame Relay is chosen as the WAN Protocol.  
Figure 33 Wide Area Frame Relay Time Slot Configuration Window  
The following section defines the fields in the Wide Area Frame Relay Time Slot configuration  
window.  
Time Slots — A full line consists of 24 Time Slots (T1 and DI) or 31 Time Slots (E1), each  
capable of up to 64 Kbps throughput. If you are leasing an entire line from your service provider,  
you may select all the Time Slots by clicking the Select All button. A “check mark” displays in the  
selected box. If you have leased a portion of a fractional T1 or E1 line, the service provider tells  
you which Time Slots are allocated for your use. In this case, select only those Time Slots.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
If you are configuring a WPIM-DI Time Slot table, any available Time Slots that are not  
NOTE  
checked are mapped to the DI Interface. In other words, If you lease an entire T1 line,  
any Time Slots that are not selected in the Frame Relay configuration window are  
used by the device connected to the DI interface.  
Once the Wide Area Frame Relay Time Slot configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button,  
and go to the Bridging and Routing Configuration section.  
Wide Area PPP Time Slot Configuration Window  
The Wide Area PPP Time Slot configuration window shown in Figure 34 displays when you click  
on the Next>> button in the Wide Area T1, E1, and DI configuration windows when PPP is chosen  
as the WAN Protocol.  
Figure 34 Wide Area PPP Time Slot Configuration Window  
96  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
The following section defines the Time Slots field in the Wide Area PPP Time Slot configuration  
window.  
Time Slots — A full line consists of 24 Time Slots (T1 and DI) or 31 Time Slots (E1) that are  
each capable of up to 64 Kbps throughput. Using the PPP Protocol, up to 24 interfaces (T1 and DI)  
or 31 interfaces (E1) can be assigned to the WAN link. Using the pull-down menu to the right of  
each Time Slot field, select the interface number that you wish to assign to the Time Slot.  
If you are configuring a WPIM-DI Time Slot table, any available Time Slots that are set  
to “00” are mapped to the DI Interface. In other words, If you lease an entire T1 line,  
NOTE  
any Time Slots that are not used in the Wide Area PPP Time Slot configuration window  
are used by the device connected to the DI interface.  
The interface numbers available in the pull-down menu are assigned in the Wide Area  
T1, E1, and DI configuration windows. Selecting the Add Interface button or the  
NOTE  
Delete Interface button allows available interface numbers to be added or deleted  
from each pull-down menu.  
Once the Wide Area PPP Time Slot configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button, and go  
to the Bridging and Routing Configuration window.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Wide Area HDSL Time Slot Configuration Window  
The Wide Area HDSL Time Slot configuration window shown in Figure 35 displays when you  
click on the Next>> button in the Wide Area HDSL configuration window.  
Figure 35 Wide Area HDSL Time Slot Configuration Window  
The following section defines the Time Slots field in the Wide Area HDSL Time Slot configuration  
window.  
Time Slots — A full line consists of 24 Time Slots, each capable of up to 64 Kbps throughput. If  
you are leasing a two pair from your service provider, you may select all the Time Slots by  
clicking the Full button. A “check mark” displays in the selected box. If you have leased one pair  
of a fractional line, click on the Fractional button to select the first 12 Time Slots.  
98  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Once the Wide Area HDSL Time Slot configuration is complete, click on the Next>> button, and  
go to the Bridging and Routing Configuration window.  
Bridging and Routing Configuration  
Once all the necessary network information is collected for the WAN, the CSX400 can be  
configured for inverse multiplexing or bridging and/or routing.  
Bridging and Routing Configuration Window  
The first Bridging and Routing configuration window shown in Figure 36 displays after clicking  
on the Next>> button at the bottom of the Wide Area (Frame Relay, PPP, or HDSL) Time Slot  
configuration window or the Wide Area (Sync or DDS) configuration window.  
Figure 36 Bridging and Routing Configuration Window  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
This section describes the fields in the first Bridging and Routing configuration window.  
Inverse Mux (Multiplex) Configuration — This function lets you balance your LAN traffic  
between two T1 WAN ports, and is used with Point to Point Protocol (PPP) or HDLC protocol.  
QuickSET automatically sets the WAN Frame Type to Encapsulated Ethernet when you use the  
Inverse Mux configuration. When you select the Inverse Mux check box, bridging, IP routing, and  
IPX routing functions are all disabled. The WAN device at the other end of the WAN link(s) must  
be a Cabletron Systems device, capable of receiving the balanced WAN traffic.  
The Inverse Mux function is enabled or disabled through QuickSET, not Local  
Management. Statistics regarding the Inverse Mux configuration are accessed via the  
NOTE  
imux MIB Navigator command. See Chapter 9, MIB Navigator, for more information.  
MAC Bridging — This field allows you to specify whether the CSX400 bridges traffic. Click on  
the check box to turn MAC Bridging on.  
Spanning Tree Protocol — This field is grayed out until MAC Bridging is turned on. It allows  
you to configure the CSX400 to use the Spanning Tree Protocol, which lets the remote device  
check for bridging loops, and other sites that use the Spanning Tree Protocol. Click on the check  
box to turn on Spanning Tree Protocol.  
IP Routing — The IP Routing check box allows you to turn on/off IP Routing. Click on the check  
box to turn on IP Routing.  
IPX Routing — The IPX Routing check box allows you to turn on/off IPX Routing. Click on the  
check box to turn IPX Routing on.  
External Ethernet 1 Network # — This field displays the IPX network number assigned to the  
external Ethernet network on Ethernet port 1. It is grayed out until IPX Routing is turned on.  
External Ethernet 2 Network # — This field displays the IPX network number assigned to the  
external Ethernet network on Ethernet port 2. It is grayed out until IPX Routing is turned on.  
Frame Type — This field is grayed out until IPX Routing is turned on. It allows you to select the  
type of IPX frame in which packets are encapsulated for transmission. Select one of the four  
available frame types.  
100  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Firewall Configuration Window  
The Firewall configuration window shown in Figure 37 displays after clicking on the Firewall...  
button in the first Bridging and Routing configuration window. The Firewall configuration window  
is used to configure an Access Control List (ACL), and to allow or deny specified IP addresses to  
communicate through the CSX400.  
The Access Control List option allows you to create access control lists that restrict traffic to, from,  
or between specific IP hosts, subnets, or networks. You can configure access control restrictions  
based on the following:  
•
•
•
The source, destination, or a combination of the source and destination address of a packet.  
The upper layer protocol type of a packet such as TCP, UDP, ICMP, or all TCP/IP protocols.  
The TCP or UDP port number of a packet.  
When an IP Access Control List (ACL) is enabled on a router port, each packet forwarded out this  
port is first checked against the ACL. If the address(es) of a packet match the address(es) in the  
first filter in the list, the packet is permitted or denied as specified by that filter. If there is no match,  
the packet is checked against the second filter, and so on, until a match is found, or until the packet  
has been checked against all of the filters in the list. If the packet does not match any of the filters,  
then the packet is permitted to pass through the port.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Figure 37 Firewall Configuration Window  
The following definitions explain the fields in the Firewall configuration window.  
The Add Firewall button clears the fields in the Firewall configuration window,  
allowing you to type in the fields as necessary. The Apply Changes button adds the  
NOTE  
newly entered filter to the Access Control List.  
ACL (Access Control List) — The Access Control List number is a number assigned to a  
specific list of sequence numbers.  
Sequence — A number assigned to individual access filters in an access list. As only one IP  
Access Control List can be applied to each port, a single list often includes several access control  
filters. Each filter permits or denies access to or from a certain host, subnet, or network. When an  
access control list contains multiple filters, the filters are referenced in order of their sequence  
numbers.  
102  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Source IP — The Source IP field displays the IP address of the source device accorded the  
permissions set in the permissions field. To set permissions for a source device, place the cursor in  
the Source IP field and type the IP address of the source that you wish to set permissions.  
Source Mask — Displays the mask for the Source IP address specified in the Source IP field. To  
set the mask for the specified source IP address, place the cursor in the Source Mask field and type  
the mask.  
The default Mask for both the source and destination addresses is 0.0.0.0, which masks the entire  
address, causing all addresses to match the filter. In other words, the default access control list  
allows all traffic to pass. Entering a mask of 255.255.255.255 causes only packets matching the  
exact address you have entered to match the filter.  
For a Class C address, entering a mask of 255.255.255.0 causes packets with the same class C  
subnet as the IP address to match, thereby causing the access control filter to apply to all hosts on  
this particular subnet.  
Dest IP — The Dest IP field displays the IP address of the destination device accorded the  
permissions set in the permissions field. To set permissions for a certain destination device, place  
the cursor in the Dest IP field and type the IP address of the destination for which you wish to set  
permissions.  
Dest Mask — Displays the mask for the Destination IP address specified in the Dest IP field. To  
set the mask for the specified destination IP address, place the cursor in the Dest Mask field and  
type the mask.  
Protocol — Use this pull-down list to select the upper layer protocol that you want to apply to the  
access control filter. Each access control filter can apply to traffic for all protocols included in the  
TCP/IP suite, or just to traffic for a single protocol.  
Permission — Use this pull-down list to set the permissions for the specified control filter.  
Options for this field include permit, deny, permit bi-directional, or deny bi-directional. Choosing  
permit allows the specified packets to be forwarded, while choosing deny blocks the specified  
packets. Choosing permit bi-directional or deny bi-directional either permits or denies traffic to  
and from a specified source or destination.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Port — Enter the port number in this field to create an access control filter that applies only to  
traffic for a specific TCP or UDP service. Table 19 and Table 20 supply a list of the standardized  
TCP and UDP port numbers.  
Table 19 TCP Services Port Numbers  
TCP Services  
Port #  
TCP Services  
Port #  
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) -data  
FTP  
20  
21  
23  
Host Name (NIC Host Name Server)  
X.400 Mail Service  
101  
103  
104  
113  
117  
119  
129  
TELNET (Terminal Connection)  
X.400 Mail Sending  
SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) 25  
AUTH Authentication Service  
UUCP-PATH Service  
Time  
37  
42  
53  
79  
80  
93  
Host Name Server  
Domain Name Server  
Finger  
NNTP (USENET News Transfer Protocol)  
PWDGEN (Password Generator Protocol)  
NETBIOS-SSN (NETBIOS Session Service) 139  
HTTPS (Secure) 443  
HTTP  
DCP (Device Control Protocol)  
Table 20 UDP Services Port Numbers  
Port # UDP Service  
UDP Service  
Port #  
Time  
37  
42  
53  
65  
67  
Bootstrap Protocol Client  
Trivial File Transfer  
68  
Host Name Server  
Domain Name Server  
TACACS-Database Service  
Bootstrap Protocol Server  
69  
Sunrpc (NIS)  
111  
137  
138  
NETBIOS Name Server  
NETBIOS Datagram Server  
When you have finished making changes, click on the Apply Changes button. Once the Firewall  
configuration is complete, click on the OK button to return to the Bridging and Routing  
configuration window.  
Once the first part of the Bridging and Routing configuration is complete, click on the Next>>  
button, and go to the second Bridging and Routing (WAN Frame Type) configuration window.  
104  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Bridging and Routing (WAN Frame Type) Configuration Window  
The second Bridging and Routing (WAN Frame Type) window shown in Figure 38 displays after  
clicking on the Next>> button at the bottom of the first Bridging and Routing configuration  
window. This window is used to select a WAN Frame Type for each interface.  
Figure 38 Bridging and Routing (WAN Frame Type) Configuration Window  
The Bridging and Routing window displays fields for each interface number and its associated  
WAN Frame Type. Select the WAN Native frame type for router to router communication. Select  
the Encapsulated Ethernet or Encapsulated Ethernet SNAP frame types for router-to-bridge, or  
bridge-to-bridge communication.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
To change the WAN Frame Type information, scroll through the list of interface entries, and select  
the interface number you wish to modify by pressing the arrow button on the left side of the  
Interface # field and press the Modify... button. The WAN Frame Type window displays.  
The WAN Frame Type window shown in Figure 39 allows you to select one of three frame types  
to be used over the WAN for each interface: Native WAN, Encapsulated Ethernet, and  
Encapsulated Ethernet SNAP. Select the WAN Frame Type that you wish to enable by clicking the  
appropriate radio button. When you are done, click the OK button. The OK button returns you to  
the Bridging and Routing (WAN Frame Type) configuration window.  
Figure 39 WAN Frame Type Configuration Window  
Once the Bridging and Routing (WAN Frame Type) configuration is complete, click on the  
Next>> button, and go to the Routing Configuration Window section.  
106  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Routing Configuration Window  
The (IP/IPX) Routing configuration window shown in Figure 40 displays after clicking on the  
Next>> button in the second Bridging and Routing (WAN Frame Type) configuration window.  
Figure 40 Routing Configuration Window  
This section describes the fields in the (IP/IPX) Routing configuration window. Refer to the IP  
Routing Configuration section to configure the CSX400 for IP routing. Otherwise, refer to IPX  
Routing Configuration section to configure the CSX400 for IPX routing.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
IP Routing Configuration  
This section describes the fields in the IP Routing Configuration section of the Routing  
configuration window.  
Interface # — Displays an interface number assigned an IP subnet.  
Remote LAN Subnet — Displays the IP subnet assigned to the interface number.  
Subnet Mask — Displays the Subnet Mask assigned to the interface number.  
Next Hop — The Next Hop is the IP address of the IP port of the next router (in the direction of  
the subnet that you are defining).  
Default Route... — Displays the Default Route window. You can select one interface to be a  
default route. A default route forwards all packets that are not defined in the routing table to the  
interface defined in the Default Route window (Unnumbered Routing Only). To set up a default  
route in “Numbered Mode” communication, click the Add Route button and enter IP Subnet  
000.000.000.000, and Subnet Mask 255.255.255.255. Then use the NEXT HOP window to enter  
the IP Address of the router you wish to designate as the default route.  
Add Route... — This button allows you to add a route and to configure the CSX400 to forward  
only those packets from the specified route.  
Delete — This button allows you to delete a route  
Advanced — This button allows you to access the Advanced Routing configuration window.  
IPX Routing Configuration  
This section describes the fields in the IPX Routing Configuration section of the (IP/IPX) Routing  
configuration window that is used to assign an IPX network number.  
Interface # — Displays all interface numbers which can be assigned an IPX network number.  
Network # — Displays the active IPX network number assigned to an interface.  
Host Map... — The IPX Host Map button takes you to the IPX Host Map window. IPX Host Map  
entries are used for IPX routing in Frame Relay mode only.  
Modify... — Use this button to change an entry in the IPX Routing Configuration window. Select  
the interface number to modify by clicking on the tab to the left of the interface number.  
108  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Host Map Window  
The Host Map window shown in Figure 41 displays after clicking on the Host Map... button in  
the (IP/IPX) Routing configuration window. Host Map entries are used for IPX routing using  
Frame Relay Protocol only. The IPX Host Map is a database of remote IPX hosts, defined  
(generally) by the WAN Network number and MAC Address, and (more specifically) by the  
Interface Number and Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The DLCI and Interface Number  
define the switched connection to the Telco control office. Enter the remote WAN MAC address  
and the remote Router’s WAN Network number.  
Figure 41 Host Map Window  
This section describes the fields in the IP Advanced configuration window.  
Interface # — Displays the active interface number. The interface number is a two-digit decimal  
number related to the Frame Relay Time Slot.  
DLCI — Displays the Data Link Connection Identifier. Use this field to enter the DLCI, which is a  
four-digit decimal number corresponding to the WAN virtual circuit connection to the Telco  
control office.  
WAN Network # — Displays the active IPX network number of the WAN connection. Use this  
field to enter the WAN Network number.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Remote MAC Address — Displays the remote Ethernet MAC address. Use this field to enter the  
remote MAC address of the device on the other end of the WAN link.  
Apply Changes — Use this button to add the configured Host Map entry to the IPX Host Map  
list.  
Add Host/Delete Host — These buttons allow you to add or delete a host and to configure the  
CSX400 to forward only those packets from the specified host. Use these buttons to add or delete  
an entry in the Host Map.  
When you have finished making changes, click on the Apply Changes button. Click the OK  
button to exit the Host Map window and return to the (IP/IPX) Routing Configuration window.  
Once your CSX400 configuration is complete, click on the Save button to save any configuration  
changes you have made. The Congratulations window displays. Click on the OK button to exit  
QuickSET.  
110  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Advanced Routing Configuration Window  
The Advanced Routing configuration window shown in Figure 42 displays after you click on the  
Advanced button in the (IP/IPX) Routing configuration window. Use this window to enable RIP  
routing, configure a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on the CSX400, set an  
IP address for a remote DHCP server, or set up Network Address Translation. If you wish to run  
your WAN connection in Numbered Mode, enter the Local WAN IP Address Subnet Mask for  
Numbered Mode or leave these fields blank for Unnumbered Mode.  
Figure 42 Advanced Routing Configuration Window  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Advanced IP Routing Settings  
This section describes the fields for the Advanced IP Routing Settings of the Advanced Routing  
configuration window.  
Interface # — Displays the active interface number.  
Local WAN IP Address — Set this value only if you are going to use numbered mode. In  
numbered mode, the Local WAN IP address is the IP address of the WAN link leading into the  
Telco control office. A Subnet Mask is required for this IP address before you can use this link.  
Subnet Mask — Displays the subnet mask for the Local WAN IP address.  
Modify — Use this button to change an entry in the Advanced IP Routing Settings box.  
Advanced IP Routing Options  
This section describes the fields for the Advanced IP Routing Options of the Advanced Routing  
configuration window.  
Enable RIP — Selecting this function enables the sending and receiving of Routing Information  
Protocol packets. Routing Information Protocol is used in IP for broadcasting open path  
information between routers to keep routing tables current.  
Redirector Window  
The Redirector window shown in Figure 43 displays after clicking on the Redirector... button in  
the Advanced Routing configuration window. The Redirector window is used to set up an IP  
address for a remote Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server.  
Figure 43 Redirector Window  
112  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
DHCP Settings Configuration Window  
The DHCP Settings configuration window shown in Figure 44 displays after clicking on the  
DHCP Server... button in the Advanced Routing configuration window. The DHCP Settings  
configuration window is used to configure the DHCP settings for the CSX400.  
Figure 44 DHCP Settings Configuration Window  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
The following definitions explain the fields in the DHCP Settings configuration window:  
DHCP Server is Enabled — Check this box to allow the CSX400 to act as a DHCP server.  
DHCP IP Address Pool — A set of contiguous IP addresses that can be assigned by the CSX400  
to devices requesting an IP address.  
Default Gateway — A location to send any packets that are not assigned to your subnet.  
Subnet Mask — The subnet mask for the default gateway (automatically set).  
Lease Timeout — Used to designate the amount of time the IP addresses in the pool can be used  
before they become invalid. Click on the pull-down menu to view a list of available leased timeout  
intervals.  
Selecting Never allows you to keep your DHCP assigned IP address until the next  
time you boot up your PC.  
NOTE  
DNS Settings — Allows you to set up an IP address and a domain name for a Domain Name  
server.  
WINS Servers — Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) resolves NETBIOS computer names  
to IP addresses.  
Server IP Address — Used to enter the IP address of your WINS server.  
114  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
NAT Settings Configuration Window  
The Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings configuration window shown in Figure 45  
displays after clicking on the NAT Settings... button in the Advanced Routing configuration  
window. The NAT Settings configuration window is used to set up Network Address Translation  
on Ethernet ports 1 and 2.  
Figure 45 NAT Settings Configuration Window  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
The following definitions explain the fields in the NAT Settings configuration window.  
Ethernet address translation to Interface # — This pull-down menu is used to disable (OFF)  
or enable NAT for an interface number. To enable NAT click the pull-down menu button and select  
an interface number to run NAT through.  
Add Proxy... — Allows you to add NAT proxy servers. Click the Add Proxy... button and an  
Add NAT Proxy Server window (Figure 46) will appear. Enter an IP Address, and select a Port  
number/type and a Protocol for each server entry.  
Delete Proxy... — Allows you to delete NAT proxy servers.  
Figure 46 Add NAT Proxy Server Window  
Once your CSX400 Advanced Routing configuration is complete, be sure to save any changes you  
make. Click on the Next>> button in the Advanced Routing configuration window to return to the  
(IP/IPX) Routing configuration window.  
116  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
QuickSET Pull-Down Menus  
The File, Firmware Upgrade and Advanced Configuration QuickSET pull-down menus allow you  
to store and restore configurations, initiate TFTP/BootP Services, and configure Compression and  
Congestion Settings for your CSX400.  
File Menu  
This section describes the pull-down menu options from the File menu as shown in Figure 47.  
Figure 47 File Menu  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Store Configuration — The Store Configuration window shown in Figure 48 displays after  
clicking on the File pull-down menu and selecting Store Configuration at the top of any  
QuickSET configuration window. The Store Configuration window stores the entire  
CyberSWITCH configuration to a file name and drive that you specify.  
Figure 48 Store Configuration Window  
Restore Configuration — The Restore Configuration window shown in Figure 49 displays after  
clicking on the File pull-down menu and selecting Restore Configuration at the top of any  
QuickSET configuration window. The Restore Configuration window allows you to load your  
stored configuration from a drive into QuickSET where it can be loaded into your CyberSWITCH  
and saved.  
Figure 49 Restore Configuration Window  
118  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Firmware Upgrade Menu  
This section describes the pull-down menu option available from the Firmware Upgrade menu as  
shown in Figure 50.  
Figure 50 Firmware Upgrade Menu  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
TFTP/BootP Services — The TFTP/BootP Services window shown in Figure 51 displays after  
clicking on the Firmware Upgrade pull-down menu and selecting TFTP/BootP Services at the  
top of any QuickSET configuration window. The TFTP/BootP Services window allows you to  
access a TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server or BootP server to download the latest  
version of CSX400 firmware.  
Figure 51 TFTP/BootP Services Window  
120  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
This section describes the modifiable fields of the TFTP /BootP Services window:  
IP Address — The IP Address field shows the IP Address of the CSX400 to which you are  
upgrading the firmware.  
Community — The Community field allows you to enter the password of your CSX400.  
Gateway IP Address — Use the Gateway IP Address field to enter the IP Address of the server  
acting as a gateway between the CSX400 and the TFTP server.  
TFTP Server IP Address — The TFTP Server Address indicates the IP address of the PC  
running this utility.  
File Name — The File Name field indicates the location and name of the firmware image you are  
putting on your CSX400.  
DownLoad — The DownLoad button starts the firmware download to your CSX400.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Advanced Configuration Menu  
This section describes the pull-down menu options available from the Advanced Configuration  
menu as shown in Figure 52.  
Figure 52 Advanced Configuration Menu  
122  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
Compression and Congestion Window  
The Compression and Congestion window shown in Figure 53 displays after you click on the  
Advanced Configuration pull-down menu and select Compression & Congestion at the top of  
any QuickSET configuration window.  
Figure 53 Compression and Congestion Window  
The Compression and Congestion window allows you to enable data compression on each  
interface. Data compression allows the size of the data being sent on a WAN link to be minimized,  
making the WAN link more efficient. To use data compression, the CSX400 must first be fully  
configured and connected to a live WAN link, and compression must be configured on any remote  
WAN device(s). Using software compression, the CSX400 supports up to four DS0s (256 Kbps)  
per WPIM. With the optional hardware compression module installed, the CSX400 supports data  
compression on all DS0s, which is equivalent to two full T1 lines. For more information on the  
hardware data compression module (CSX-COMP/ENCR) refer to Chapter 2,  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CSX400 Configuration with QuickSET  
The following defines the fields in the Compression and Congestion window.  
Interface — Displays the available, pre-configured interface numbers.  
Compression — Displays the status of data compression for a specific interface. Options for this  
field are either on (box shows a check mark) or off.  
The following defines the fields for Frame Relay only:  
Committed # Burst — Displays the Committed Burst size, which is the maximum amount of  
data a user may offer to the network during a calculated time interval. Data is guaranteed not to be  
discarded by the network.  
Excess # Burst — Displays the Excess Burst size, which is the maximum amount of data by  
which a user can exceed the Committed Burst size. This data is not guaranteed to be passed by the  
network.  
Throughput — Displays the maximum bandwidth of your WAN connection.  
To turn data compression on or off for a specific interface, click on the interface number that you  
wish to configure in the compression scroll list, then click the compression check box. Clicking the  
Apply Changes button applies the changes to the interface.  
Once compression configuration is complete, click on the Save button to save any changes you  
make, then click on the Exit button to exit the Compression and Congestion window.  
124  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
General Configuration Using Local  
Management  
This chapter explains how to access and manage the CSX400 and its attached segments through a  
TELNET connection. A general working knowledge of basic network operations and an  
understanding of management applications is helpful prior to using Cabletron Systems Local  
Management.  
This chapter describes how to perform the following:  
•
•
•
•
Access the CSX400 through a TELNET application  
Identify and operate the types of fields used by Management  
Navigate through Management fields and menus  
Use Management screens to perform management operations  
Chapter Organization  
The following list summarizes the organization of this chapter:  
Local Management Overview outlines the contents of this chapter, provides an overview of  
Local Management, and explains how to use the management screens.  
Accessing Local Management describes how to access the Main Menu screen and navigate  
through the Local Management screens.  
System Level Screen describes how to use the System Level screen, its functions, and operations.  
SNMP Community Names Screen explains how to control access to the CSX400 by assigning  
community names.  
SNMP Traps Screen explains how to configure the CSX400 to send SNMP traps to multiple  
network management stations.  
Flash Download Screen describes how to download new firmware to the CSX400.  
Bridge Setup Screen describes how to configure the CSX400 for bridge functions.  
IP Configuration Screen describes how to configure the CSX400 for IP routing functions.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
IPX Configuration Screen describes how to configure the CSX400 for IPX routing functions.  
WAN Setup describes how to configure the CSX400 for a Wide Area Network (WAN) interface.  
If you have a WPIM-HDSL installed in your CSX400, refer to the WAN Setup section of  
this chapter for configuration information. For all other WPIMs, refer to your specific  
NOTE  
WPIM(s) Local Management Guide for information on this screen.  
Local Management Overview  
Cabletron Systems Local Management is a management tool that allows a network manager to  
perform the following tasks:  
•
•
•
Configure interconnected devices to form a network.  
Monitor the performance of the network.  
Control user access to the network and its components for the purpose of security.  
Management Agent  
The management agent is a process within the CSX400 that collects information about the  
operational performance of the managed network. Local Management communicates with the  
management agent for the purpose of issuing management commands to network devices.  
Local vs. Remote Management  
Network management applications are usually described as either local or remote management  
applications. A Local Management application resides within the circuits of the CSX400  
management agent and is accessible by making a TELNET connection through one of the two  
EPIM ports located on the front panel of the device. Remote management applications such as  
Cabletron Systems SPECTRUM, SPECTRUM Element Manager, or QuickSET run in another  
device that provides management services. This allows you to perform network management from  
a remote location.  
126  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Local Management Screen Elements  
There are five basic field elements shown in the Local Management screen in Figure 54.  
EVENT MESSAGE FIELD  
DISPLAY FIELDS  
INPUT FIELDS  
SELECTION FIELDS  
SAVED OK  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
Local Management  
SYSTEM LEVEL  
01/23/96  
System Date:  
System Time: 14:23:00  
Host IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Phys Address  
000.000.000.000  
255.255.0.0  
00-00-1D-16-26-F8  
Out of Band IP Addr  
Default Gateway  
Default Interface  
0.0.0.0  
NONE DEFINED  
NONE DEFINED  
COM 1 Application:  
COM 2 Application:  
[LM]  
[UNASSIGNED]  
SAVE  
RETURN  
090836  
COMMAND FIELDS  
Figure 54 Sample Local Management Screen  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
The following list explains each of the basic Local Management screen fields:  
Event Message Field — This field briefly displays messages that indicate if a Local  
Management procedure was executed correctly or incorrectly, that changes were saved or not  
saved to Non-Volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM), or that a user did not have access  
privileges to an application.  
Table 21 describes the most common event messages. Event messages related to specific Local  
Management applications are described with those applications throughout this manual.  
Table 21 Event Messages  
Message  
Meaning  
SAVED OK  
One or more fields were modified,  
and saved to NVRAM.  
NOT SAVED?--PRESS SAVE TO  
KEEP CHANGES  
One or more fields were modified,  
but not yet saved to NVRAM.  
NOTHING TO SAVE  
The SAVE command was executed,  
but nothing was saved to NVRAM.  
Display Fields — Display fields cannot be edited. These fields may display information which  
never changes, or changes as the result of Local Management operations, user selections, or  
network monitoring information.  
Input Fields — Input fields require keyboard characters to be entered. IP addresses, System Date,  
and System Time are examples of Input fields.  
Selection Fields — Selection fields provide a series of possible values. Only applicable values  
appear in Selection fields.  
Command Fields — Command fields are located at the bottom of Local Management screens.  
Command fields are used to exit Local Management screens and to save Local Management  
entries. Command fields perform a management action simply by being selected and activated.  
Only command fields can make a change to a device’s configuration.  
128  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Local Management Keyboard Conventions  
All key names in this manual display as capital letters. For example, the ENTER key displays as  
ENTER, the Escape key displays as ESC, and the Backspace key displays as BACKSPACE.  
Table 22 explains the keyboard conventions used in this manual as well as the key functions.  
Table 22 Keyboard Conventions  
Key  
Function  
These selection keys perform the same Local Management function. For  
example, “Press ENTER” means that you can press either ENTER or  
RETURN, unless this manual specifically instructs you otherwise.  
ENTER and RETURN  
This key lets you escape from a Local Management screen without saving  
your changes. For example, “Press ESC twice” means that you must quickly  
press the ESCAPE key two times to exit the Local Management screen.  
ESC  
These keys cycle through selections in some Local Management fields. Press  
the SPACE bar to cycle forward through selections and press BACKSPACE to  
cycle backward through selections.  
SPACE bar and  
BACKSPACE  
These are navigation keys. Use the UP-ARROW, DOWN-ARROW,  
LEFT-ARROW, and RIGHT-ARROW keys to move the screen cursor. For  
example, “Use the arrow keys” means to press whichever arrow key moves the  
cursor to the desired field on the Local Management screen.  
Arrows  
This key combination increments values in some Local Management selection  
fields. For example, “Press SHIFT-[+/=]” means to hold down the SHIFT key  
while pressing the PLUS/EQUAL key.  
SHIFT-[+/=]  
This key decreases values from some Local Management selection fields. For  
example, “Press [–]” means to press the MINUS key.  
[–]  
The DEL (Delete) key removes characters from a Local Management  
Selection field. For example, “Press DEL” means to press the DELETE key.  
DEL  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Navigating Within Local Management Screens  
To navigate within a Local Management screen, use the arrow keys of the terminal or the  
workstation providing terminal emulation services. The Local Management screen cursor  
responds to the LEFT-ARROW, RIGHT-ARROW, UP-ARROW, and DOWN-ARROW keys. Each  
time you press an arrow key, the Local Management screen cursor moves to the next available field  
in the direction of the arrow key.  
The Local Management screen cursor only moves to fields which can be selected or used for input.  
This means that the cursor jumps over display fields and empty lines on the Local Management  
screen.  
The Local Management screen cursor provides wrap-around operation. This means that a cursor  
located at the edge of a screen, when moved in the direction of that edge, “wraps around” to the  
outermost selectable item on the opposite side of the screen which is on the same line or column.  
Selecting Local Management Menu Screen Items  
To select items in a Local Management menu screen, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item.  
2. Press ENTER. The selected Local Management menu screen displays.  
Exiting Local Management Screens  
To exit any of the Local Management screens, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the RETURN command at the bottom of the Local  
Management screen.  
2. Press ENTER. The previous screen in the Local Management hierarchy displays.  
You can also exit Local Management screens by pressing ESC twice. This exit method  
does not warn you about unsaved changes and all unsaved changes are lost.  
NOTE  
Exiting the Local Management Session  
To exit from CSX400 Local Management, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the RETURN command at the bottom of the Local  
Management screen.  
2. Press ENTER. The previous screen in the Local Management hierarchy displays.  
130  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the Main Menu screen displays.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the EXIT command at the bottom of the Main Menu screen.  
5. Press ENTER. The CSX400 Local Management Password screen displays and the Local  
Management session ends.  
Establishing a TELNET Connection  
The CSX400 is shipped with a temporary IP Address of 192.168.254.254 so that your computer  
can communicate with it over your Local Area Network (LAN) through a TELNET connection.  
However, to establish a TELNET connection, your computer must be on the same subnet as the  
CSX400. Cabletron Systems recommends that you assign a temporary IP Address of  
192.168.254.253 to your computer to ensure that both devices are on the same subnet. TELNET  
connections to the host device require the community name passwords assigned at the SNMP  
Community Names screen or if you are doing an initial configuration, use the default password  
public. Refer to the SNMP Community Names section of this manual for additional information  
about community names.  
See the instructions included with the TELNET application for information about  
establishing a TELNET session.  
NOTE  
Local Management Screen Hierarchy  
Local Management consists of a series of menu screens that provide a path to each of the Local  
Management function screens. Navigate through Local Management by selecting items from the  
menu screen. Figure 55 shows the hierarchy of the Local Management screens.  
System Level  
SNMP Community Names  
IP Configuration  
IP RIP  
SNMP Traps  
Flash Download  
Bridge Setup  
Router Setup  
WAN Setup  
IP  
Setup Menu  
Password  
Main Menu  
IPX Configuration  
IPX RIP  
IPX  
IPX SAP  
MIB Navigator  
Figure 55 Hierarchy of Local Management Screens  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Accessing Local Management  
This section explains how to access and use the Local Management menu screens. Menu screens  
provide a path to the setup screens and status screens.  
Using the Menu Screens  
Once you have accessed the CSX400 through a TELNET connection, the CSX400 Password  
screen, shown in Figure 56, displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
CABLETRON Systems, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 5005  
Rochester, NH 03867-5005 USA  
(603) 332-9400  
(c) Copyright CABLETRON Systems, Inc. 19XX  
Device Model Number:  
Serial Number:  
Functionality Level:  
Flash Image Version:  
XX.XX.XX  
XX.XX.XX  
BOOTPROM Version:  
Board Revision:  
Enter Password:  
Figure 56 CSX400 Password Screen  
Type in your password and press ENTER. If you are doing an initial configuration, the default  
super-user access password is “public” or press ENTER.  
Your password is one of the community names specified in the SNMP Community  
Names screen. Access to certain Local Management capabilities depends on the  
NOTE  
degree of access accorded that community name. See the SNMP Community Names  
section.  
•
If you enter a valid password, the associated access level displays at the bottom of the screen  
and the Main Menu screen, shown in Figure 57, displays.  
132  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
•
•
If you enter an invalid password, the cursor returns to the beginning of the password entry field.  
If no activity occurs for several minutes, the Password screen displays again, ending your  
current session. You must reenter the password to perform Local Management tasks.  
Main Menu Screen  
The Main Menu screen is the starting point from which all the Local Management screens are  
accessed. Figure 57 shows the Main Menu screen.  
CSX400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version: XX.XX.XX  
MAIN MENU  
SETUP MENU  
MIB NAVIGATOR  
EXIT  
Figure 57 Main Menu Screen  
The Main Menu screen displays the following menu items:  
Setup Menu — The Setup Menu provides access to Local Management screens that are used to  
configure the CSX400.  
MIB Navigator — The MIB Navigator is a Local Management utility that allows the user to  
access, monitor, and set specific Management Information Base (MIB) items within the CSX400.  
Refer to Chapter 9, MIB Navigator, for information on the MIB Navigator.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Setup Menu Screen  
The Setup Menu screen provides access to the Local Management screens that are used to  
configure the CSX400. Examples of functions accessible through the Setup Menu include  
configuring the host IP address and Subnet Mask, assigning the SNMP community names, and  
configuring the SNMP trap notification. Figure 58 shows the Setup Menu.  
HSIM-W6 Local Management  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
SETUP MENU  
SYSTEM LEVEL  
SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES  
SNMP TRAPS  
FLASH DOWNLOAD  
BRIDGE SETUP  
ROUTER SETUP  
WAN SETUP  
RETURN  
2012_03  
Figure 58 Setup Menu Screen  
The Setup Menu screen displays the following menu items:  
System Level — The System Level screen allows you to configure basic operating parameters  
for the CSX400.  
SNMP Community Names — The SNMP Community Names screen allows you to change or  
review the community names used as access passwords for local management operation.  
SNMP Traps — The SNMP Traps screen provides display and configuration access to the table  
of IP addresses used for trap destinations and associated community names.  
134  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Flash Download — The Flash Download screen allows you to download a firmware image from  
a TFTP server to the CSX400.  
Bridge Setup — The Bridge Setup screen allows you to select a Spanning Tree protocol and  
enable/disable switch ports.  
Router Setup — The Router Setup screen accesses two other screens that provide general IP or  
IPX routing configuration and allow you to enable or disable the Routing Information Protocol  
(RIP) and the Service Advertisement Protocol (SAP) features.  
WAN Setup – The WAN Setup menu item accesses two other screens that provide WAN physical  
configuration and WAN Interface configuration access to enable a WAN link to be set up.  
If you have a WPIM-HDSL installed in your CSX400, refer to the WAN Setup section of  
this chapter for configuration information. For all other WPIMs, refer to your specific  
NOTE  
WPIM(s) Local Management Guide for information on configuring the CSX400 for a  
Wide Area Network Interface.  
System Level Screen  
The System Level screen displays the physical address (MAC address) of the CSX400 and allows  
you to set the following parameters:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
System Date  
System Time  
Host IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
Default Interface  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Access the System Level screen (Figure 59) from the Setup Menu screen by using the arrow keys  
to highlight the System Level option and pressing ENTER. The System Level screen displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
SYSTEM LEVEL  
System Date:  
12/30/97  
0.0.0.0  
255.255.0.0  
00-00-1D-16-26-F8  
System Time: 14:23:00  
Host IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Phys Address  
Default Gateway  
Default Interface  
NONE DEFINED  
NONE DEFINED  
COM 1 Application: [LM]  
SAVE  
RETURN  
2012_04  
Figure 59 System Level Screen  
The following definitions explain each System Level screen field. The sections which follow these  
definitions explain the use of these fields.  
System Date — Use this field to enter the system date, as described in Setting the System Date.  
System Time — Use this field to enter the system time, as described in Setting the System  
Time.  
Host IP Address — Use this field to enter the IP address of the CSX400, as described in Setting  
the Host IP Address.  
136  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Subnet Mask — This field displays the default Subnet Mask, and allows you to enter a new value  
for the Subnet Mask if necessary. Subnets are logical divisions of the network that isolate groups  
of devices. The Subnet Mask determines how the CSX400 directs SNMP traps to a management  
workstation. If the CSX400 resides on the same network as the management workstation, then the  
CSX400 sends SNMP traps directly to the management workstation. If the CSX400 resides on a  
different subnet as the management workstation, then the CSX400 sends SNMP traps to a gateway  
or router.  
•
When the management workstations designated to receive SNMP traps reside on the same  
network as the CSX400, use the Subnet Mask default setting for the IP address entered on the  
System Level screen.  
•
Set a new value for the Subnet Mask when the management workstations designated to receive  
SNMP traps reside on a different subnet (for example, across a gateway or router)  
To set a Subnet Mask, refer to the Setting the Subnet Mask section.  
Phys Address — This field displays the physical address of the CSX400. You cannot modify the  
physical address.  
Default Gateway — Use this field to enter the Default Gateway for the CSX400. When routing  
packets, the CSX400 uses the IP Forwarding Table to find the route to each destination address.  
The IP Forwarding Table contains the routes to all networks and hosts within a certain area.  
However, the IP Forwarding Table on its own cannot provide all of the routes that may be needed.  
The CSX400 relies on a Default Gateway to provide the routes to destinations that are not listed in  
its own IP Forwarding Table. The Default Gateway is the IP address of the network device  
(gateway or router) used to forward SNMP traps to a management station. The default setting for  
this field is NONE DEFINED. To set the Default Gateway, refer to Setting the Default Gateway.  
Default Interface — Use this field to select the default interface for the CSX400 Default  
Gateway. The default interface is the channel which is set up to handle SNMP traps sent to an IP  
station that is not on the same subnet as the CSX400 in an IP routed environment. The default  
setting for this field is NONE DEFINED. To set the default interface for the Default Gateway of  
the CSX400, refer to Setting the Default Interface.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Setting the System Date  
The CSX400 is year 2000 compliant so that the System Date field can be set beyond the year 1999.  
To set the system date, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the System Date field.  
2. ENTER the date in an MM/DD/YY YY format.  
When entering the date in the system date field, you do not need to add separators  
between month, day, and year numbers, as long as each entry uses two decimal  
NOTE  
numbers. For example, to set the date to 03/17/1997, type “03171997” in the System  
Date field.  
3. Press ENTER to set the system date.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press  
ENTER.  
If the date entered was a valid format, the Event Message field at the top of the screen displays  
“SAVED OK”. If the entry was not valid, Local Management does not alter the current value and  
refreshes the System Date field with the previous value.  
Setting the System Time  
To set the system time, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the System Time field.  
2. ENTER the time in a 24-hour format, HH:MM:SS.  
When entering the time in the system time field, you do not need to add separators  
between hours, minutes, and seconds, as long as each entry uses two decimal  
NOTE  
numbers. For example, to set the time to 6:45 a.m., type “064500” in the System Time  
field.  
3. Press ENTER to set the system time.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and press  
ENTER. If the time entered was a valid format, the Event Message field at the top of the screen  
displays “SAVED OK”. If the entry was not valid, Local Management does not alter the current  
value and refreshes the System Time field with the previous value.  
138  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Setting the Host IP Address  
To set the host IP address, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Host IP Address field.  
2. Enter the IP address using Decimal Dotted Notation (DDN) format.  
For example: 134.141.25.17  
3. Press ENTER. If the IP address entered was a valid format, the cursor returns to the beginning  
of the Host IP Address field. If the entry was not valid, the Event Message field displays  
“INVALID IP ADDRESS OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management does not alter the  
current value and refreshes the Host IP Address field with the previous value.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
5. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
Setting the Subnet Mask  
Subnets are logical divisions of the network. To change the Subnet Mask from its default value,  
perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Subnet Mask field.  
2. Enter the Subnet Mask using Dotted Decimal Notation (DDN) format. Values for each decimal  
can be from 0 to 255.  
For example: 255.255.0.0  
3. Press ENTER. If the Subnet Mask entered was a valid format, the cursor returns to the  
beginning of the Subnet Mask field. If the entry was not valid, the Event Message field displays  
“INVALID SUBNET MASK OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management does not alter  
the current value and refreshes the Subnet Mask field with the previous value.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
5. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
Setting the Default Gateway  
To set the Default Gateway, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Default Gateway field.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General Configuration Using Local Management  
2. ENTER the IP address of the Default Gateway using DDN format.  
For example: 134.141.79.121  
3. Press ENTER. If the Default Gateway address entered was a valid format, the cursor returns to  
the beginning of the Default Gateway field. If the entry was not valid, the Event Message field  
displays “INVALID DEFAULT GATEWAY OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management  
does not alter the current value and refreshes the Default Gateway field with the previous value.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
5. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
Setting the Default Interface  
To set the default interface, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Default Interface field.  
2. ENTER the interface number for the Default Gateway in this field.  
3. Press ENTER. If the interface entered was a valid format, the cursor returns to the beginning of  
the Subnet Mask field. If the entry was not valid, the Event Message field displays  
“PERMISSIBLE RANGE: 1...1”. Local Management does not alter the current value and  
refreshes the Default Interface field with the previous value.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
5. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
140  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
SNMP Community Names Screen  
This section explains how to assign community names. Community names allow you to control  
Local Management access by establishing three passwords. Each password controls varying levels  
of access to CSX400 Local Management.  
Access the SNMP Community Names screen, shown in Figure 60, from the Setup Menu screen  
by using the arrow keys to highlight the SNMP Community Names option and pressing ENTER.  
The SNMP Community Names screen displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version: XX.XX.XX  
SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES  
Community Name  
Access Policy  
public  
public  
public  
read-only  
read-write  
super-user  
SAVE  
RETURN  
2012_05  
Figure 60 SNMP Community Names Screen  
Community Name Access Policy  
To perform any operations on the SNMP Community Names screen, you must have used the  
super-user community name at the User Password prompt when initiating the Local Management  
session. The default community name for each access level is public or press ENTER.  
The following explains each of the SNMP Community Names screen fields:  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Community Name — Displays the user-defined names through which a user accesses the  
CSX400 Local Management. Any community name entered here acts as a password to Local  
Management.  
Access Policy — Indicates the access status accorded each community name. Possible status  
conditions are:  
read-only — This access level allows reading of device parameters not including community  
names.  
read-write — This access level allows editing of some device configuration parameters not  
including changing or viewing community names.  
super-user — This access level allows full management privileges.  
Setting SNMP Community Names  
To set a community name, perform the following steps:  
If you edit the super-user community name, be certain you do not forget it. If you do, you  
cannot perform Local Management functions without returning the device to its factory  
default configurations. This effectively erases any configuration work you have done.  
!
CAUTION  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the community name you want to change.  
2. Type the new community name and press ENTER. The old community name is replaced by the  
new community name.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
4. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
142  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
SNMP Traps Screen  
The SNMP Traps screen, shown in Figure 61, allows the user to configure the CSX400 to send  
traps to as many as eight remote management workstations. SNMP traps are messages about  
network events and device operational statistics.  
Access the SNMP Traps screen from the Setup Menu screen by using the arrow keys to highlight  
the SNMP Traps option and pressing ENTER. The SNMP Traps screen displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version: XX.XX.XX  
SNMP TRAPS  
Trap Destination  
0.0.0.0  
Trap Community Name  
public  
Enable Traps  
(NO)  
0.0.0.0  
public  
(NO)  
0.0.0.0  
public  
(NO)  
0.0.0.0  
public  
(NO)  
0.0.0.0  
public  
(NO)  
0.0.0.0  
public  
(NO)  
0.0.0.0  
public  
(NO)  
0.0.0.0  
public  
(NO)  
RETURN  
SAVE  
2012_06  
Figure 61 SNMP Traps Screen  
Trap Table Screen Fields  
The following definitions explain each of the SNMP Traps screen fields:  
Trap Destination — Use this field to enter the IP address of the management workstation  
designated to receive SNMP traps from the CSX400.  
Trap Community Name — Use this field to enter the community name of the management  
workstation with the associated IP address. The community name indicates the “access level” of  
traps that will be forwarded to the Trap destination.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Enable Traps — Use this field to enable the transmission of SNMP traps to the management  
workstation.  
Setting the SNMP Trap Destination  
Each management workstation designated to receive SNMP traps from the CSX400 must have a  
valid IP address and community name. To set and enable SNMP trap destination, perform the  
following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Trap Destination field that you want to modify.  
2. Type the IP address of the management workstation designated to receive SNMP traps from the  
CSX400. This address must be entered in DDN format.  
For example: 134.141.25.17  
3. Press ENTER. If the IP address entered was a valid format, the cursor returns to the beginning  
of the Trap Destination IP address field. If the entry was not valid, the Event Message field  
displays “INVALID IP ADDRESS OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management does not  
alter the current value and refreshes the Trap Destination IP address field with the previous  
value.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Trap Community Name field (on the same row as the Trap  
Destination field).  
5. Type the community name of the management workstation. The community name indicates the  
“access level” of traps that will be forwarded to the Trap destination.  
6. Press ENTER.  
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Enable Traps field (on the same row as the Trap  
Destination and Trap Community Name you have just configured). The default setting for this  
field is NO.  
8. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to set the field to YES.  
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
10. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
11. Repeat this procedure as necessary to set each Trap Destination.  
144  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Flash Download Screen  
The Flash Download screen allows you to download a firmware image from a TFTP server to the  
CSX400.  
Access the Flash Download screen from the Setup Menu screen by using the arrow keys to  
highlight the Flash Download option and pressing ENTER. The Flash Download screen, shown in  
Figure 62, displays.  
Flash download operations require a properly named download file and a properly  
configured download server.  
NOTE  
CSX400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version: XX.XX.XX  
FLASH DOWNLOAD  
Download Method:  
[RUNTIME]  
Reboot After Download:  
Last Image Server IP:  
[YES]  
134.141.17.12  
Last Image File Name:  
c:/tftpboot/csx400.hex  
Download Server IP:  
Download File Name:  
134.141.17.12  
c:/tftpboot/csx400.hex  
EXECUTE  
RETURN  
2012_07  
Figure 62 Flash Download Screen  
The following definitions explain each of the Flash Download screen fields.  
Download Method — Use this field to select the method you wish to use to download the  
firmware image to the CSX400.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
•
•
•
Reboot After Download — This field displays when the RUNTIME Download Method is  
chosen. Selecting YES forces the CSX400 to reboot and use the new firmware image  
immediately. Selecting NO allows the CSX400 to continue using the existing firmware image  
without interrupting network operation.  
Commit to Flash — This field displays when the BOOTPROM Download Method is chosen.  
Selecting YES allows the CSX400 to continue using the existing firmware image without  
interrupting network operation and selecting NO allows the CSX400 to reboot and use the new  
firmware image immediately.  
TFTP Gateway Server IP — This field displays when the BOOTPROM Download Method  
is chosen. Use this field to enter the IP address of the TFTP Gateway Server.  
Last Image Server IP — Displays the IP address of the last server used to download a firmware  
image to the CSX400.  
Last Image File Name — Displays the file name of the last firmware image downloaded to the  
CSX400.  
Download Server IP — Use this field to type in the IP address of the server from which you wish  
to download the firmware image.  
Download File Name — Use this field to type in the file name of the firmware image you wish to  
download to the CSX400.  
Selecting a Flash Download Method  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download Method field.  
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select a flash download method.  
•
•
If you select RUNTIME, the Reboot After Download field displays.  
If you select BOOTPROM, the Commit to Flash field and the TFTP Gateway Server IP  
field display.  
146  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
RUNTIME Download  
If you select RUNTIME Download, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Reboot After Download field.  
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select one of the following:  
•
•
YES, if you want the CSX400 to reboot and use the new firmware image immediately.  
NO, if you want the CSX400 to continue using the existing firmware image without  
interrupting network operation. The CSX400 stores the new firmware image in flash  
memory. When you reset the CSX400, it boots from flash memory using the new image.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download Server IP field.  
4. Type the IP address of the download server and press ENTER.  
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download File Name field.  
6. Type the complete path and filename of the new image file to be downloaded. You must include  
all directories and subdirectories involved in accessing the file. Type the new entry over the  
previous entry. For example: c:\images\cyberswitch\11011.hex  
7. Press ENTER.  
8. Use the arrow keys to highlight the EXECUTE command located at the bottom of the Flash  
Download screen.  
9. Press ENTER to begin the download. The CSX400 attempts to download the file using the IP  
address, filename, and path provided. This file is assigned to the Flash memory of the CSX400.  
BOOTPROM Download  
If you select a BOOTPROM Download, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Commit to Flash field.  
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select one of the following:  
•
YES, if you want the CSX400 to continue using the existing firmware image without  
interrupting network operation. The CSX400 stores the new firmware image in flash  
memory. When you reset the CSX400, it boots from flash memory using the new image.  
•
NO, if you want the CSX400 to reboot and use the new firmware image immediately.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download Server IP field.  
4. Type the IP address of the download server and press ENTER.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download File Name field.  
6. Type the complete path and filename of the new image file to be downloaded. You must include  
all directories and subdirectories involved in accessing the file. Type the new entry over the  
previous entry. For example: c:\images\cyberswitch\11011.hex.  
7. Press ENTER.  
8. Use the arrow keys to highlight the TFTP Gateway Server IP field.  
9. Enter the IP address of the TFTP gateway server.  
10. Use the arrow keys to highlight the EXECUTE command located at the bottom of the Flash  
Download screen. The CSX400 attempts to download the file using the IP address, filename,  
and path provided. This file is assigned to the Flash memory of the CSX400.  
148  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Bridge Setup Screen  
The Bridge Setup screen enables you to select a Spanning Tree protocol and enable/disable bridge  
ports.  
Access the Bridge Setup screen, shown in Figure 63, by using the arrow keys to highlight the  
Bridge Setup option and pressing ENTER. The Bridge Setup screen displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version: XX.XX.XX  
BRIDGE SETUP  
SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL:  
[IEEE 802.1]  
BRIDGE PORT ADMIN STATUS:  
PORT 01 --> ALL PORTS  
[ENABLED]  
[ENABLED]  
BRIDGE PORT PAIR ADMIN STATUS:  
PORT XX --> PORT [02]  
SAVE  
BRIDGE_PORT [01]  
RETURN  
2012_08  
Figure 63 Bridge Setup Screen  
Bridge Setup Screen Fields  
The following list describes each of the Bridge Setup screen fields:  
Spanning Tree Protocol — Use this field to select a Spanning Tree protocol. Possible selections  
for this field are IEEE 802.1, DEC, or NONE.  
Bridge Port Admin Status — Use this field to enable or disable individual CSX400 bridge ports.  
Possible selections for this field are ENABLED or DISABLED.  
Bridge Port Pair Admin Status — Use this field to enable or disable bridging between bridge  
port pairs. For example, you can enable Port 1 to bridge traffic to all ports except Port 2.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Bridge_Port X — Use this command field to select the CSX400 bridge port you want to  
configure.  
Selecting a Spanning Tree Protocol  
To select the Spanning Tree protocol to be used by the CSX400, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL field.  
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select [IEEE 802.1], [DEC], or [NONE].  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
4. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
Selecting the Bridge Port Administrative Status  
To select the bridge port administrative status, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the [BRIDGE_PORT XX] field at the bottom of the Bridge  
Setup screen.  
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select the bridge port you want to configure. The  
selected bridge port displays in the Bridge Port Admin Status field.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the BRIDGE PORT ADMIN STATUS: PORT X - - > ALL  
PORTS [ENABLED] field.  
4. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select ENABLE or DISABLE.  
For example, the following bridge setup indicates that bridge port 01 is configured to bridge  
traffic to all ports:  
BRIDGE PORT ADMIN STATUS: PORT 01 - - > ALL PORTS [ENABLED]  
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
6. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
150  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Selecting the Bridge Port Pair Administrative Status  
To select the bridge port pair administrative status, perform the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the [BRIDGE_PORT XX] field at the bottom of the Bridge  
Setup screen.  
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select the bridge port you want to configure. The  
selected bridge port displays in the Bridge Port Pair Admin Status field.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the BRIDGE PORT PAIR ADMIN STATUS: PORT X - ->  
PORT [Y] field.  
4. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select the port you want to enable or disable bridge  
traffic.  
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the BRIDGE PORT PAIR ADMIN STATUS: PORT X - ->  
PORT [Y] [ENABLED] field.  
6. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE to select ENABLE or DISABLE.  
For example, the following bridge setup indicates that bridge port 01 is configured NOT to  
bridge traffic to bridge port 02:  
BRIDGE PORT PAIR ADMIN STATUS: PORT 01 - - > PORT [02] [DISABLED]  
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field.  
8. Press ENTER. The Event Message field at the top of the screen displays “SAVED OK”.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Router Setup Screen  
The Router Setup screen allows you to choose either IP or IPX routing for your CSX400.  
Access the Router Setup screen, shown in Figure 64, by using the arrow keys to highlight the  
ROUTER SETUP menu item in the Setup Menu and pressing ENTER. The Router Setup screen  
displays.  
HSIM-W6 Local Management  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
ROUTER SETUP  
IP  
IPX  
RETURN  
INITIALIZE  
IP/IPX  
Figure 64 Router Setup Screen  
Router Setup Fields  
The following list describes the Router Setup fields.  
IP — Use this field to access the IP Configuration screen to configure the CSX400 for IP routing.  
IPX — Use this field to access the IPX Configuration screen to configure the CSX400 for IPX  
routing.  
152  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
IP Configuration Screen  
The IP Configuration screen enables you to access the IP General Config and IP RIP screens to  
configure the CSX400 for IP Routing and enable RIP on the CSX400.  
Access the IP Configuration screen, shown in Figure 65, by using the arrow keys to highlight the  
IP menu item on the Router Setup screen and pressing ENTER. The IP Configuration  
screen displays.  
CSX 400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
IP CONFIGURATION  
IP General Config  
IP RIP  
RETURN  
2012_09  
Figure 65 IP Configuration Screen  
IP Configuration Screen Fields  
The following list describes each of the IP Configuration screen fields.  
IP General Config — Use this field to access the IP General Config screen and configure the  
CSX400 for IP routing.  
IP RIP — Use this field to access the IP RIP screen and enable Routing Information Protocol  
(RIP) routing on the CSX400.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
IP General Config Screen  
The IP General Config screen allows you to configure the CSX400 for IP routing.  
Access the IP General Config screen by using the arrow keys to highlight the IP General Config  
menu item and pressing ENTER. The IP General Config screen shown in Figure 66 displays.  
CSX 400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
IP General Config  
Router Name: IP  
Version: XX.XX.XX  
Status: Enabled  
AdminStatusTime: 0 days 0 hours 39 min  
UpTime: 0 days 0 hours 39 min  
System Level Setup  
0.0.0.0  
37  
IP Routing: ENABLED  
Redirector: FORWARD  
Server:  
UDP Port:  
37 of 999  
UDP Type: time  
Port Level Setup  
Description: Ctron CSX400 EnetPort  
Port:  
1
Interf. Type: ethernet-csmacd  
MAC Address: 00-00-1D-22-46-B0  
Framing: Ethernet  
MTU: 1500  
Oper Status: Enabled  
Address: 134.141.17.177  
Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Address Type: Primary  
Network Bcast: Ones  
IP Routing: ENABLED  
IP Forwarding: ENABLED  
Proxy ARP: DISABLED  
+PORT-  
+REDIRECTOR-  
SAVE  
RETURN  
2012_11  
Figure 66 IP General Config Screen  
IP General Configuration Status Fields  
The following list describes each of the IP General Config status fields. The status fields are for  
informational purposes only and cannot be modified.  
Router Name — Displays the type of routing used.  
Status — Displays the status of IP Routing.  
UpTime — Displays the amount of time elapsed since the last time the CSX400 was rebooted.  
Version — Displays the IP Routing version number used on the CSX400.  
154  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
AdminStatusTime — Displays the amount of time elapsed since an IP address was assigned to  
the CSX400.  
UDP Type — Displays the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Service to which the selected UDP  
Port number corresponds.  
Description — Describes the selected Port.  
MAC Address — Displays the physical (MAC) address of the CSX400.  
Interf.Type — Displays the type of interface used by the specified port.  
Oper Status — Displays the operational status of the selected port.  
IP General Configuration Fields  
This section provides a general overview of the procedures required to configure the CSX400. The  
following list describes each of the modifiable IP General Config Screen fields.  
+PORT- — Use this field to select the routing port you wish to configure.  
+REDIRECTOR- — Use this field to toggle through a list of commonly used UDP port numbers.  
UDP port numbers are associated with the relay agent functionality of the router.  
Framing — Use this field to select the format of the frame in which IP packets are encapsulated  
for transmission.  
MTU — Use this field to set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU).  
IP Routing — Use this field to enable IP Routing Services.  
IP Forwarding — Use this field to enable IP Forwarding.  
Proxy ARP — Use this field to enable Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).  
Address — Use this field to assign an IP address to the port that you wish to configure.  
Mask — Use this field to set the Subnet Mask for the port that you wish to configure.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Selecting a Port for Configuration  
Routing Services allows you to choose the ports that you want to configure for IP routing. To select  
a router port to configure for IP routing, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the PORT option.  
2. Type in the number of the port that you want to configure for IP routing and then press ENTER.  
You can type in the port number, or you can use the +PORT- option at the bottom of  
NOTE  
the screen to scroll through the list of the ports on your device. To use the +PORT-  
option, use the arrow keys to highlight the + (to go forward), or the - (to go backward),  
and then press ENTER to scroll through the available ports in the direction you have  
selected.You can also use the + and - keys to scroll through the available ports.  
If you type in an invalid port number, the error message “PORT NUMBER IS OUT OF RANGE”  
displays. Perform steps 1 and 2 again.  
Entering the IP Address and Subnet Mask  
All IP hosts must have an IP Address for each network interface. These addresses identify each  
network connection.  
To enter the IP address for a router port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the ADDRESS option.  
2. Type in the IP address and then press ENTER.  
Once an IP address is entered, the default Subnet Mask automatically enters into the Mask field. To  
to change the default Subnet Mask for a router port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the MASK option.  
2. Type in the Subnet Mask for the IP address that you have assigned.  
Selecting the Frame Type for a Port  
On each port, Frame Type specifies the format of the frame in which IP packets are encapsulated  
for transmission. The Frame Type options available for each router port are dependent on the type  
of media supported by that router port.  
To select the Frame Type for a port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Framing option.  
2. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to the correct Frame Type for the port.  
156  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
Setting the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)  
The Maximum Transmission Unit specifies the maximum packet size for all IP packets that are  
transmitted.  
To select the MTU for a port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the MTU option under Port Level Setup.  
2. ENTER an MTU value for the media used.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen, then press  
ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
Enabling IP Routing Services on a Port  
The ability to switch IP Routing Services on and off on a port-by-port basis, provides great  
flexibility. On the same device, some ports can be routing IP traffic while other ports are bridging  
it. As you are in transition from a bridged network to a routed network, this flexibility allows you  
to implement IP routing and test your routing configuration on a port-by-port basis. If necessary,  
you can temporarily disable the IP routing on any port without losing your configuration, or you  
can temporarily switch from IP routing back to bridging.  
To enable IP Routing Services on a router port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IP Routing option under Port Level Setup.  
2. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen, and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
Enabling IP Forwarding on a Port  
By default, IP Forwarding is disabled on each router port. Your device cannot begin forwarding IP  
data packets on any router port until you enable IP Forwarding on that port.  
To enable IP Forwarding on a router port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IP Forwarding option.  
2. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
Configuring the UDP Broadcast Redirector  
To locate a server that can provide a particular network service, many IP hosts rely on the use of  
LAN broadcasts to send UDP service requests. The UDP port number contained in the broadcast  
request packet identifies the service being requested. Table 23 shows the port numbers and their  
corresponding requested services.  
Table 23 UDP Port Numbers  
UDP Port #  
UDP Services  
37  
Time  
42  
Host Name Server  
53  
Domain Name Server  
65  
TACACS-Database Service  
Bootstrap Protocol/Dynamic Host Control Protocol Server  
Bootstrap Protocol/Dynamic Host Control Protocol Client  
Trivial File Transfer  
67  
68  
69  
137  
138  
111  
NETBIOS Name Server  
NETBIOS Datagram Server  
Sunrpc (NIS)  
The UDP Broadcast Redirector enables you to configure any Routing Services enabled device to  
forward the UDP packets that it receives as LAN broadcasts, directly to the appropriate server.  
UDP service requests that are sent as LAN broadcasts by clients of applications such as Host  
Name, Domain Name, and Bootstrap servers, can be redirected to any server on any network  
segment.  
To configure the UDP Broadcast Redirector, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the UDP Port option under System Level Setup.  
2. ENTER the UDP port number of the UDP service request packets that you want to redirect  
(refer to Table 23) and then press ENTER.  
158  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
You can type in the UDP port number, or you can use the +REDIRECTOR- option at  
the bottom of the screen to scroll through a list of commonly used UDP port numbers.  
NOTE  
To use the +REDIRECTOR- option, use the arrow keys to highlight the + (to go  
forward), or the - (to go backward), and then press the ENTER key to scroll in the  
direction that you selected.  
The entry for the UDP Port option reflects the UDP port number that is currently selected. The  
entry for UDP Type names the UDP service to which that port number corresponds.  
Enabling Proxy ARP on a Port  
By default, Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is disabled on all ports, and IP Routing  
Services respond only to ARP requests addressed to its own IP address.  
For one IP host to communicate with another IP host, knowledge of the target host’s MAC address  
must be known. To learn this MAC address, the IP host sends an ARP request packet as a LAN  
broadcast with the destination IP address of the target IP host. All hosts receive this broadcast and  
the one host that matches the target IP address responds with its MAC-layer address. However,  
because each subnet constitutes a separate broadcast domain and LAN broadcasts are not  
forwarded across routers, ARP does not work beyond a host’s local network or subnetwork. One of  
the primary purposes of a router is to confine LAN broadcast traffic to each local network or  
subnetwork.  
A proxy ARP response is generated when the following occurs:  
•
•
Proxy ARP is enabled on a router port.  
An ARP request is received as a LAN broadcast (looking for the MAC-layer address of an IP  
host on another network segment).  
•
An entry exists in the IP Forwarding Table for the destination host’s network.  
Enabling Proxy ARP on a router port allows IP hosts to dynamically obtain the MAC-layer address  
of other IP hosts attached to different networks or subnetworks by using broadcast ARP request  
packets. With Proxy ARP enabled, IP hosts are not required to maintain knowledge of specific  
subnetworks.  
To enable Proxy ARP on a router port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Proxy ARP option.  
2. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen, and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
Configuring the Network Broadcast Type on a Port  
IP Routing Services recognizes and accepts network broadcasts, IP packets with the host portion  
of the IP address as either all 1’s or all 0’s. Other networking devices only recognize all 0’s as a  
network broadcast.  
To configure IP Routing Services to send network broadcasts addressed to all 0’s, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Network Bcast option.  
2. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ZEROS.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
Enabling the RIP Routing Protocol on a Port  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is a widely implemented routing protocol that is used  
extensively on IP internetworks. IP Routing Services uses the RIP routing protocol to send and  
gather information about the internetwork topology. This information is used to construct and  
maintain a database called RIP Route Table, which contains the addresses of the available routes to  
all the networks and hosts that RIP has learned.  
Enabling the RIP routing protocol allows IP Routing Services to build and maintain a dynamic  
database of route information. The best routes learned by the RIP routing protocol are added to the  
IP Forwarding Table to forward IP packets. The ability to switch the RIP routing protocol on and  
off on a port-by-port basis provides great flexibility. On the same device, some router ports can be  
running the RIP routing protocol while other router ports are not. If necessary, you can temporarily  
disable the RIP routing protocol on any port without affecting the rest of your configuration.  
To enable RIP Routing, complete the following steps:  
1. From the IP Configuration screen, highlight IP RIP and then press ENTER.  
The IP RIP Configuration screen, shown in Figure 67, displays.  
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the System Level RIP-1 option.  
3. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port Level RIP-1 option.  
160  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
5. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen, and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
IP Address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
IP RIP CONFIGURATION  
Port:  
1
System Level RIP-1:  
Port Level RIP-1:  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
+PORT-  
SAVE  
RETURN  
Figure 67 IP RIP Configuration Screen  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
IPX Configuration Screen  
The IPX Configuration screen enables you to access the IPX General Config, IPX RIP, and IPX  
SAP screens to configure the CSX400 for IPX Routing and enable RIP routing or Source  
Advertisement Protocol (SAP) routing on the CSX400.  
Access the IPX Configuration screen, shown in Figure 68, by using the arrow keys to highlight the  
IPX menu item on the Router Setup and pressing ENTER. The IPX Configuration screen displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
IPX CONFIGURATION  
IPX General Config  
IPX SAP  
IPX RIP  
RETURN  
Figure 68 IPX Configuration Screen  
IPX Configuration Fields  
The following list describes each of the IPX Configuration screen fields.  
IPX General Config — Use this field to access the IPX General Config screen and configure the  
CSX400 for IP routing.  
IPX SAP — Use this field to access the IPX SAP screen and enable Source Advertisement  
Protocol (SAP) routing on the CSX400.  
IPX RIP — Use this field to access the IPX RIP screen and enable Routing Information Protocol  
(RIP) on the CSX400.  
162  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
IPX General Configuration Screen  
The IPX General Configuration screen allows you to configure the CSX400 for IPX routing.  
Access the IPX General Configuration screen by using the arrow keys to highlight the IPX  
General Config menu item and pressing ENTER. The IPX General Configuration screen shown  
in Figure 69 displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
IPX General Configuration  
Router Name: IPX  
Version: XX.XX.XX  
Status: Enabled  
AdminStatusTime: 0 days 0 hours 39 min  
UpTime: 0 days 0 hours 39 min  
System Level Setup  
IPX Routing:ENABLED  
Port Level Setup  
Port:  
1
Description: Ctron CSX400 EnetPort  
MAC Address: 00-00-1D-22-46-B0  
Interf. Type: ethernet-csmacd  
Framing: Novell  
MTU: 1500  
Oper Status: Enabled  
IPX Address: 0.0.0.0  
IPX Forwarding: DISABLED  
IPX Routing: DISABLED  
+PORT-  
SAVE  
RETURN  
Figure 69 IPX General Configuration Screen  
IPX General Configuration Status Fields  
The following list describes each of the IPX General Config status fields. The status fields are for  
informational purposes only and cannot be modified.  
Router Name — Displays the type of routing used.  
Status — Displays the status of IP Routing.  
UpTime — Displays the amount of time elapsed since the last time the CSX400 was rebooted.  
Version — The version number of the IP Routing used on the CSX400.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
AdminStatusTime — Displays the amount of time elapsed since an IP address was assigned to  
the CSX400.  
Description — Describes the selected Port.  
MAC Address — Displays the physical (MAC) address of the CSX400.  
Interf.Type — Displays the type of interface used by the specified port.  
Oper Status — Displays the operational status of the selected port.  
IPX General Configuration Fields  
This section provides a general overview of the procedures required to configure the CSX400. The  
following list describes each of the IPX General Config fields.  
+PORT- — Use this field to select the routing port that you wish to configure.  
Framing — Use this field to select the format of the Frame in which IPX packets are  
encapsulated for transmission.  
MTU — Use this field to set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU).  
IPX Routing — Use this field to enable IP Routing Services.  
IPX Forwarding — Use this field to enable IP Forwarding.  
IPX Address — Use this field to assign an IP Address to the port that you wish to configure.  
Selecting a Port for Configuration  
Routing Services allows you to choose the ports that you want to configure for IPX routing. To  
select a router port to configure for IPX routing, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the PORT option.  
2. Type in the number of the port that you want to configure for IPX routing, then press ENTER.  
You can type in the port number, or you can use the +PORT- option at the bottom of  
NOTE  
the screen to scroll through the list of the ports on your device. To use the +PORT-  
option, use the arrow keys to highlight the + (to go forward), or the - (to go backward),  
and then press ENTER to scroll through the available ports in the direction you have  
selected.You can also use the + and - keys to scroll through the available ports.  
164  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
If you type in an invalid port number the error message: “PORT NUMBER IS OUT OF RANGE”  
displays. Perform steps 1 and 2 again.  
Entering the IPX Address  
All IPX hosts must have an IPX Address for each network interface. These addresses identify each  
network connection.  
To enter the IPX Address for a router port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IPX ADDRESS option.  
2. Type in the IPX Address in Dotted Decimal Notation (DDN) format and then press ENTER.  
Selecting the Frame Type for a Port  
On each port, Frame Type specifies the format of the frame in which IPX packets are encapsulated  
for transmission. The Frame Type options available for each router port are dependent on the type  
of media supported by that router port.  
To select the Frame Type for a port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Framing option.  
2. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to the correct Frame Type for the port.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
Setting the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)  
The Maximum Transmission Unit specifies the maximum packet size for all IPX packets that are  
transmitted.  
To select the MTU for a port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the MTU option under Port Level Setup.  
2. ENTER an MTU value for the media used.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Enabling IPX Routing Services on a Port  
The ability to switch IPX Routing Services on and off on a port-by-port basis provides great  
flexibility. On the same device, some ports can be routing IPX traffic while other ports are bridging  
it. As you are in transition from a bridged network to a routed network, this flexibility allows you  
to implement IPX routing and test your routing configuration on a port-by-port basis. If necessary,  
you can temporarily disable IPX routing on any port without losing your configuration, or you can  
temporarily switch from IPX routing back to bridging.  
To enable IPX Routing Services on a router port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IPX Routing option under Port Level Setup.  
2. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
Enabling IPX Forwarding on a Port  
By default, IPX Forwarding is disabled on each router port. Your device cannot begin forwarding  
IPX data packets on any router port until you enable IPX Forwarding on that port.  
To enable IPX Forwarding on a router port, complete the following steps:  
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IPX Forwarding option.  
2. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
166  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
IPX Routing over Frame Relay  
An additional step is required when routing IPX over Frame Relay. This step requires that entries  
are created in the IPX Host Map. The IPX Host Map is a database of remote IPX hosts that are  
defined generally by the WAN Network number and MAC Address, and more specifically by the  
Interface Number and Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The IPX Host Map helps a routing  
decision by determining which circuit a packet should be forwarded to in a point to multi-point  
Frame Relay connection.  
Figure 70 shows how IPX Host Map entries are entered using the circuitmap command. The  
circuitmap command is accessed from the MIB Navigator Screen. Refer to Chapter 9 for more  
information on the circuitmap command.  
MIBNav-> circuitmap -s IPX 2 00000172 00:00:1d:02:d1:7a 102  
# Interface  
# 2  
Network  
00000172  
Node  
00:00:1d:23:a1:5b  
Circuit ID  
102  
Figure 70 Circuitmap Command  
The circuitmap command contains the following fields:  
#Interface — An entry must be created for each remote Router connected via the Frame Relay  
interface.  
Network — The Network is the IPX Network number associated with the Frame Relay network.  
Node — The Node is the MAC address of the remote router on the other end of the WAN link.  
Circuit ID — The Circuit ID is the DLCI identifying the virtual circuit connection to the Telco.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Enabling the IPX SAP Routing Protocol on a Port  
IPX Source Advertisement Protocol (SAP) is used by IPX to exchange information about Novell  
service providing nodes, such as file servers and print servers that are available. IPX SAP builds  
and maintains a database, the Service Advertisement Table, containing the addresses and routes to  
specific service providing nodes, and advertises this information over the network.  
Each router running IPX SAP gathers this LAN based information from the locally connected  
network segments and adds it to its Service Advertisement Table. Each table contains the Novell  
Network Number and type of services available on all Novell servers known to the IPX SAP. IPX  
routing services uses this information to provide internetworked NetWare clients with access to  
these services.  
168  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
To enable SAP Routing, complete the following steps:  
1. From the IPX Configuration screen, highlight IPX SAP and then press ENTER.  
The IPX SAP Configuration screen, shown in Figure 71, displays.  
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port option.  
3. Type in the number of the port that you wish to enable SAP routing, then press ENTER.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port Level SAP option.  
5. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen, and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
IPX Address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
IPX SAP CONFIGURATION  
Port:  
1
System Level SAP:  
Port Level SAP:  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
+PORT-  
SAVE  
RETURN  
Figure 71 IPX SAP Configuration Screen  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Enabling RIP on a Port  
IPX RIP (Routing Information Protocol) is a widely implemented routing protocol that is used  
extensively on IPX intermediations. IPX Routing Services uses the RIP to send and gather  
information about the internetwork topology. This information is used to construct and maintain a  
database, called the RIP Route Table, containing the addresses and available routes to all the  
networks and hosts that RIP has learned.  
Enabling RIP allows IPX Routing Services to build and maintain a dynamic database of route  
information. The best routes learned by RIP are added to the IPX Forwarding Table to be used to  
forward IPX packets. The ability to switch RIP on and off on a port-by-port basis provides great  
flexibility. On the same device, some router ports can be running RIP while other router ports are  
not. If necessary, you can temporarily disable RIP on any port without affecting the rest of your  
configuration.  
170  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
To enable RIP Routing, complete the following steps:  
1. From the IPX Configuration screen, highlight IPX RIP and then press ENTER.  
The IPX RIP Configuration screen, shown in Figure 72, displays.  
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port option.  
3. Type in the number of the port that you wish to enable RIP routing and then press ENTER.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port Level RIP option.  
5. Use the ENTER key to toggle the entry to ENABLED.  
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command field at the bottom of the screen, and then  
press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.  
CSX400 Local Management  
IPX Address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
IPX RIP CONFIGURATION  
Port:  
1
System Level RIP:  
Port Level RIP:  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
+PORT-  
SAVE  
RETURN  
Figure 72 IPX RIP Configuration Screen  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
WAN Setup  
This section describes the HDSL WPIM. For all other WPIMs, refer to your specific  
WPIM(s) Local Management Guide for information on this screen.  
NOTE  
The WAN Setup menu item accesses two screens which allow you to configure the CSX400 for a  
WAN Physical Interface Module (WPIM).  
Access the WAN Physical Configuration screen, shown in Figure 73, by using the arrow keys to  
highlight the WAN SETUP menu item and pressing ENTER. The WAN Physical Configuration  
screen displays.  
Local Management  
Flash Image Version XX.XX.XX  
WAN PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION  
WPIM 1  
WPIM 2  
Type: HDSL  
BRIM #: 1  
Type: T1  
BRIM #: 2  
Mode: [Primary]  
Active: Yes  
Mode: [Primary]  
Active: Yes  
Ifaces: 027  
Ifaces: 003-026  
WPIM 1 Line Configuration  
HDSL Tx Clock Source:  
HDSL Timeslot Configuration:  
[Loop-Timing]  
[Fractional]  
SAVE  
[WPIM 1]  
WAN INT CONFIG  
RETURN  
Figure 73 WAN Physical Configuration Screen  
172  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Configuration Using Local Management  
WAN Physical Configuration Screen Fields  
The following list describes the WAN Physical Configuration screen fields.  
The CSX400 supports a variety of WPIMs. Figure 73 shows the WAN Physical  
Configuration screen for the WPIM-HDSL and the WPIM-T1. To select the WPIM you  
NOTE  
wish to configure, use the arrow keys to highlight the [WPIM #] field at the bottom of the  
screen. Use the SPACEBAR to select the appropriate WPIM, then press ENTER.  
WPIM # — Displays configuration information for the WPIMs that are installed.  
Type — Displays the WPIM type.  
BRIM # — Displays the BRIM slot in which the WPIM resides.  
Mode — Displays the WPIM mode.  
Active — Displays the status of the WPIM.  
Ifaces — Displays the interfaces available to each WPIM.  
WPIM-HDSL Configuration Fields  
HDSL Tx Clock Source — Displays the HDSL Transmit Clock Source. The selections for this  
field toggle between Loop-Timing (Extracted Line Data) and Local-Timing (Internal Clock). The  
default setting for this field is Loop-Timing.  
The Loop-Timing selection in this Local Management screen corresponds to the Slave  
selection in the QuickSET HDSL WAN Configuration window; the Local-Timing  
NOTE  
selection corresponds to the Master selection.  
HDSL Timeslot Configuration — Displays the timeslot configuration for the WPIM. The  
selections for this field toggle between Full and Fractional. The default setting for this field is Full.  
Full uses all 24 timeslots and Fractional uses the first 12 timeslots.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
WAN Interface Configuration Screen  
To access the WAN Interface Configuration screen shown in Figure 74, use the arrow keys to  
highlight the WAN INT CONFIG selection at the bottom of the WAN Physical Configuration  
screen, then press ENTER.  
Local Management  
Flash Image Version: xx.xx.xx  
WAN INTERFACE CONFIGURATION  
PT# IF# LID STATE PT# IF# LID STATE  
Interface Number: [002]  
017  
018  
019  
020  
021  
022  
023  
024  
025  
026  
001 001 Enet  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
010  
UP  
Max Xmit Unit:  
Line Coding:  
0
[NONE]  
[NONE]  
Active Protocol:  
011  
012  
027  
028  
013  
014  
015  
029  
030  
031  
016  
032  
PORTS:  
[xx-xxx]  
SAVE  
RETURN  
1484_04  
Figure 74 WAN Interface Configuration Screen  
WAN Interface Configuration Screen Fields  
This section describes the WAN Interface Configuration screen fields.  
Interface Number — Displays the active Interface Number. Use this field to configure the  
Interface Numbers assigned on the WAN Physical Configuration screen.  
Max Xmit Unit — User-configured field that displays the maximum packet size that can be  
transmitted on the selected Interface. The default values are 8191 for PPP and 4095 for Frame  
Relay.  
Line Coding — Displays the Line Coding for Timeslots associated with this interface. This field  
displays JBZS, INV-HDLC, or None. The default setting is None.  
174  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Configuration Using Local Management  
Active Protocol — Displays the active OSI Layer protocol. This field displays None, FR (Frame  
Relay), or PPP (Point-to-Point). The default setting is None.  
If you select PPP, the following field appears:  
PPP Type:  
This field displays BNCP or LEX.  
Circuit State:  
Toggles between Active, Inactive and Invalid.  
PT# — Displays the application ports (bridge ports) available from the host platform to the WAN.  
If the active protocol is PPP, Local Management assigns only one application port per interface  
number (IF#). If the active protocol is Frame Relay, Local Management assigns the available WAN  
bridge ports from the host platform, one per DLCI.  
You can assign WAN application ports to the 31 interfaces for the PPP configuration that suits your  
needs. In a Frame Relay configuration, you can assign all WAN application ports to one interface.  
In this example, the remaining 30 interfaces would not have WAN application ports available.  
The quantity of application ports for a Frame Relay network is determined by the quantity of  
DLCIs (Data Link Connection Identifiers) assigned to that Interface. This is determined either  
manually or by the LMP (Link Management Protocol).  
IF# — Displays the Interface that is associated with the application port.  
LID — Displays the Link Identifier. If the active protocol is Frame Relay, the Data Link  
Connection Identifier is displayed. If the active protocol for this interface is PPP, then PPP displays  
in this field.  
STATE — Displays the status of the application port. If the active protocol is Frame Relay, this  
field displays the status as Active, Inactive, or Disabled (for No LMI). If the active protocol is PPP,  
this field displays UP (for active) or DOWN (for inactive).  
PORTS: [xx-xxx] — Toggles through the ports.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Configuration Using Local Management  
176  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
MIB Navigator  
This chapter explains how to use the MIB Navigator utility. The MIB Navigator allows access to a  
command set from which you can configure and manage the CSX400.  
Chapter Organization  
The following list summarizes the organization of this chapter:  
MIB Navigator Screen – describes the MIB Navigator screen and explains how to access it.  
MIB Navigator Command Set Overview – describes the types of commands available to the  
MIB Navigator.  
Navigation Commands – explains the commands used to navigate through the MIB Navigator.  
Other Commands – explains other commands that allow you to access and manage network  
devices connected to the device running the MIB Navigator.  
Special Commands – explains the special commands that allow you to exit from the MIB  
Navigator.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
MIB Navigator Screen  
Access the MIB Navigator screen from the Main Menu screen using Local Management (refer to  
the Accessing Local Management section in Chapter 8). Using the arrow keys, highlight the  
MIB NAVIGATOR option, then press ENTER. The MIB Navigator screen shown in Figure 75  
displays.  
Welcome to MIB Navigator  
MIBNav-> help  
Navigation Commands:  
branch  
dir  
cd  
ctron  
grep  
next  
su  
get  
Is  
mib2  
set  
pwd  
tree  
whoami  
help  
Other Commands:  
arp  
bridge  
defroute  
circuitmap  
nat  
imux  
ppp  
dhcp  
ping  
netstat  
route  
reset  
snmpget  
secondIP  
snmpnext  
snmpbranch  
snmptree  
show  
snmpset  
traceroute  
SPECIAL:  
done, quit, or exit - Exit from the MIB Navigator.  
mib2 - Change directory to MIB II (/1/3/6/1/2/1).  
ctron - Change directory to Cabletron MIB (/1/3/6/1/4/1/52).  
For help with a specific command, type 'help <command>'.  
MIBNav->  
Figure 75 The MIB Navigator Screen  
Managing Device MIBs  
The MIB Navigator lets you manage objects in the CSX400 Management Information Bases  
(MIBs). MIBs are databases of objects used for managing the device and determining the CSX400  
configuration. The commands within the MIB Navigator allow you to view and modify a device’s  
objects.  
178  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MIB Navigator  
The MIB Navigator views the MIB tree hierarchy as a directory. Figure 76 shows the MIB tree  
hierarchy. Each layer is numerically encoded, so that every branch group and leaf object in the  
MIB is identified by a corresponding number, known as an Object Identifier (OID). This allows the  
MIB Navigator to navigate through the MIB and access the manageable leaf objects.  
Object 1.1.1  
Object 1.1.2  
Group 1.1  
Object 1.2.1  
Root 1  
Group 1.2  
Group 1.3  
Object 1.2.2  
Object 1.3.1  
Object 1.3.2  
1574-27  
Figure 76 Hierarchical MIB Tree Structure  
Often an ASCII name is assigned to the OID of a leaf object, making it more readable. To identify  
the value for the object “ipForwarding” you use the OID (/1/3/6/1/2/1/4/1), or its ASCII name (/  
iso/org/dod/internet/mgmt/mib-2/ip/ipForwarding).  
MIB Navigator Command Set Overview  
Use the help command for an on-line description of each MIB Navigator command. For  
example MIB Nav-> help branch provides help information for the branch command.  
TIP  
The MIB Navigator command set provides the following commands:  
Navigation Commands — Navigation commands allow you to access and manage the MIB for  
the device running the MIB Navigator. Some of these commands also provide user  
community-string information. The commands are as follows:  
branch  
dir  
Is  
pwd  
tree  
cd  
get  
mib2  
set  
whoami  
ctron  
grep  
next  
su  
help  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MIB Navigator  
Other Commands — Other commands allow you to access and manage network devices  
connected to the device running the MIB Navigator. The commands are as follows:  
arp  
dhcp  
bridge  
imux  
circuitmap  
nat  
defroute  
netstat  
ping  
ppp  
reset  
route  
secondIP  
snmpnext  
show  
snmpset  
snmpbranch  
snmptree  
snmpget  
traceroute  
Special Commands — Special Commands allow you to exit from the MIB Navigator. The  
commands are as follows:  
done  
quit  
exit  
Conventions for MIB Navigator Commands  
This manual uses the following conventions for denoting commands:  
•
•
Information keyed by the user is shown in this helvetica font.  
Command arguments are indicated by two types of brackets:  
-
-
required arguments are enclosed by [ ].  
optional arguments are enclosed by < >.  
MIB Navigator command conventions are as follows:  
•
To abort the output or interrupt a process the escape character is ^C (where ^ indicates the  
Control key).  
•
A slash (/) preceding an OID issues that command from the root directory regardless of where  
you are in the MIB. If no slash precedes the OID the command issues from your current MIB  
location.  
•
Dot notation (1.1.1.1) is equivalent to slash notation (1/1/1/1). Use slash notation with the  
navigational commands, and the dot notation with the built-in commands that are using SNMP  
to access and manage network devices.  
180  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
MIB Navigation Commands are listed in the format shown below:  
command:  
Syntax:  
This entry provides the format that the MIB Navigator command  
requires. It indicates where arguments, if any, must be specified.  
Description:  
Options:  
This entry briefly describes the command and its uses.  
This entry lists any additional fields which may be added to the  
command and their format.  
Example:  
This entry shows an example of the command.  
Navigation Commands  
The following MIB Navigation commands allow you to move from MIB object to MIB object  
within the MIB tree.  
branch:  
Syntax:  
branch [path]  
Description:  
The branch command displays all of the leaves in the MIB tree below a  
specified path. The information displayed includes the pathname, the  
object ASCII name, the type of object (i.e., integer, counter, time tick,  
etc.), and the current value of each leaf object.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> branch  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/7/1 udpInDatagrams  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/7/2 udpNoPorts  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/7/3 udpInErrors  
COUNTER 38216  
COUNTER  
COUNTER  
0
0
051456  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIB Navigator  
cd:  
Syntax:  
cd [path] or cd <option>  
Description:  
The cd command allows you to change directories within a MIB subtree  
(branch). The path specified must be valid, or the MIB Navigator will not  
perform the cd operation.  
Options:  
.. Moves you one subtree above the current one.  
/ Moves you to the root.  
Example:  
MIBNav-> cd iso/org/dod/internet/mgmt  
051457  
ctron:  
Syntax:  
ctron  
Description:  
The ctron command allows you to change directories to the Cabletron  
MIB (1.3.6.1.4.1.52) without keying in the entire path.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> ctron  
051458  
182  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
help:  
Syntax:  
help <command>  
Description:  
The help command provides general help on how to use the MIB  
Navigator or how to use a particular MIB Navigator command.  
Options:  
A particular MIB Navigator command.  
Example:  
MIBNav-> help su  
Command:  
Format:  
su  
su <Community Name>  
Allows user to change his/her community name, in  
order to allow different access to the MIB.  
051459  
mib2:  
Syntax:  
mib2  
Description:  
The mib2 command allows you to move directly to the MIB II subtree  
(1.3.6.1.2.1) without entering the entire path.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> mib2  
051460  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
next:  
Syntax:  
next [path]  
Description:  
The next command enables you to determine the next leaf in the  
specified path within the managed device’s MIB.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> next /1/3/6/1/2/1  
#/1/3/6/1/2/1/1/1  
sysDescr  
String CtronRev.X.XX.XX  
051461  
pwd:  
Syntax:  
pwd  
Description:  
The pwd command displays the full pathname for the directory in which  
you are currently working. The directory is displayed in ASCII format.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> pwd  
# /iso/org/dod/internet/mgmt/mib-2  
051462  
184  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
set:  
Syntax:  
set <OID> <value>  
Description:  
The set command enables you to set the value of a managed object. This  
command is valid only for leaf entries in the current MIB tree, or for  
managed objects in the MIB.  
If the leaf specified does not exist for the given path, MIB Navigator asks  
for a value. The following lists possible value types:  
(i)nteger - number  
(c)ounter - number  
(g)auge - number  
(t)ime ticks - number  
o(p)aque - “value” (with quotation marks)  
(s)tring - “value” (with quotation marks)  
(o)id - OID number with dotted punctuation  
(a)ddress - IP address in DDN format  
(m)ac - MAC address in hexadecimal format  
(n)ull - no type  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> set /1/3/6/1/4/1/52/1/6/4/7 122.1.1.1  
Type: (i)nteger (a)ddress (c)ounter (g)auge (o)id:  
051463  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
su:  
Syntax:  
su [community name]  
Description:  
The su command enables you to change your community name to allow  
for different access to the MIB. The community name that you enter  
allows you either read-only, read-write, or super-user access to that  
device’s MIBs, depending on the level of security access assigned the  
password through the SNMP Community Names screen. Refer to the  
SNMP Community Names Screen section in Chapter 8 for more  
information about community names.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> su public  
051464  
tree:  
Syntax:  
tree  
Description:  
The tree command provides a display of the entire MIB for the device.  
Leaves and associated values are displayed in columns.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> tree  
EMRev X.X.X.X  
1.3.6.1.4.1.52  
8098654  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/1 sysDescr  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/2 sysObjectId  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/3 sysUpTime  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/4 sysContact  
STRING  
OBJECT ID  
TIME TICKS  
STRING  
AlZwie/MIS  
051465  
186  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
whoami:  
Syntax:  
whoami  
Description:  
The whoami command displays your community string and access  
privileges to the MIB. When using the whoami command, one of these  
three access levels displays: read-only, read-write, and super-user.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> whoami  
# Community Name  
# Access Level  
: super  
: SuperUser  
051466  
grep:  
Syntax:  
grep <option> string  
Description:  
Allows a user to search the MIB tree for a specific character string. All  
leafs in the MIB tree are searched.  
Options:  
-m: Displays on the terminal one screen at a time.  
-i: Ignores case when searching for string.  
Example:  
MIBNav-> grep -i cabletron # /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/1 sysDescr String Cabletron MMAC-Plus Revision 01_01_01  
051457  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
dir:  
Syntax:  
dir [- 1pdm] [PATH]  
Description:  
Lists the contents of the directory sub-tree specified. If no  
[directory-path] is specified, the contents of the current directory are  
displayed. The display options are:  
-1: Displays the OID value along with theASCII name of the leaf object.  
-p: Lists all the entries along with the path name of the leaf object.  
-d: Lists only the directory entries in the tree.  
-m: Displays one screen at a time.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> cd/iso/org/dod/internet  
dir  
mgmt  
private  
dir - lp  
/1/3/6/1/4/iso/org/dod/internet/private  
dir  
get:  
Syntax:  
get <PATH>  
Description:  
Returns the value of a managed object. This is only valid for “leaf”  
entries in the MIB tree (or managed objects in the MIB).  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> get /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/1  
#System name description  
get  
188  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
ls:  
Syntax:  
ls [-1pdm] [PATH]  
Description:  
Lists the contents of the directory sub-tree specified. If no  
[directory-path is specified, the contents of the current directory are  
displayed. The display options are:  
-1: Displays the OID value along with the ASCII name of the leaf object.  
-p: Lists all the entries along with the path name of the leaf object.  
-d: Lists only the directory entries in the tree.  
-m: Displays one screen at a time.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> cd/iso/org/dod/internet  
ls - lp  
mgmt  
private  
ls - lp  
/1/3/6/1/2 /iso/org/dod/internet/mgmt  
/1/3/6/1/4 /iso/org/dod/internet/private  
ls  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
Other Commands  
The Other commands listed in this section activate functions on the LM managed device or devices  
being accessed through MIB Navigation.  
arp:  
Syntax:  
arp <options>  
Description:  
The arp command provides access to the ARP (Address Resolution  
Protocol) cache, enabling you to view cache data, delete entries, or add  
a static route. Super-user access is required to delete an entry or add a  
static route.  
Each ARP cache entry lists: the network interface that the device is  
connected to, the device’s network address or IP address, the device’s  
physical address or MAC address, and the media type of connection to  
the device. Media types are displayed as numbers, which stand for the  
following states:  
1 - Other  
2 - Invalid entry (cannot ping device, timed out, etc.)  
3 - Dynamic route entry  
4 - Static route entry (not subject to change)  
Options:  
-a Views cache data  
-d Deletes an IP address entry.  
Requires additional arguments: <Interface Number> <IP address>  
-s Adds a static entry.  
Requires additional arguments: <Interface Number> <IP address>  
<MAC address>  
190  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIB Navigator  
Example:  
MIBNav-> arp -a  
Media Type  
3(dynamic)  
3(dynamic)  
3(dynamic)  
3(dynamic)  
# Interface  
# (SonicInt)  
# (SonicInt)  
# (SonicInt)  
# (SonicInt)  
Network Address  
122.144.40.111  
122.144.48.109  
122.144.52.68  
122.144.21.43  
Physical Address  
00.00.0e.12.3c.04  
00.00.0e.f3.3d.14  
00.00.0e.12.3c.04  
00.00.0e.03.1d.3c  
MIBNav-> arp -d 1 122.144.52.68  
MIBNav-> arp -s 1 22.44.2.3 00:00:0e:03:1d:3c  
051467  
defroute:  
Syntax:  
defroute [interface number] [IP address]  
Description:  
The defroute command allows you to set the default IP route to a  
managed device through the specified interface.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> defroute 2 147.152.42.32  
051469  
dhcp:  
Syntax:  
dhcp <options>  
Description:  
The dhcp command provides a status of the Dynamic Host Configuration  
Protocol feature. Allows the user to enable/disable DHCP globally and  
by interface, and to configure interfaces with server parameters.  
Options:  
dhcp (with no options) Displays DHCP status information.  
dhcp enable/disable. Enables or disables the DHCP feature globally.  
dhcp <IFNUM> enable disable Enables or disables the DHCP feature  
by interface.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
dhcp reclaim <IPADDRESS> Reclaims an IP address so another client  
can use it.  
dhcp <IFNUM> <GATEWAY> <DNSADDRESS>  
<WINSADDRESS> <DOMAINNAME> The IFNUM is the Ethernet  
port number. The four configuration parameters can be passed to the  
hosts (clients). These are the IP address of their default gateway, the IP  
address of their domain name server, the IP address of their WINS  
server, and their domain name.  
dhcp <IFNUM> <NETADDRESS> <NETMASK>  
<LOWADDRESS> <HIGHADDRESS> <LEASE> Allows the user  
to specify the lease period for the hosts (clients), from one hour to many  
years. Selectable on a per port basis only.  
<IFNUM> The Ethernet port number.  
<NETADDRESS> The IP network on which the hosts will reside.  
<NETMASK> The subnet mask for the hosts.  
<LOWADDRESS> The lowest numerical value of the IP range to be  
allocated.  
<HIGHADDRESS> The highest numerical value of the IP range.  
Example:  
MIBNav->dhcp  
DHCP Server Summary:  
Admin: Enabled Oper: Enabled Server Time: 458400  
Discovers: 0, Offers: 0, Requests: 2, Errors: 0  
Declines: 0, Releases: 0, Acks: 2, Naks: 0, Other Servers: 0  
DHCP Interface Configuration:  
IF  
1
Admin  
Oper  
ServerIP  
Active Free  
Enabled Enabled 192.168.254.254  
2
250  
IF Net Address  
Net Mask  
Low Address  
High Address  
Lease  
1
192.168.254.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.254.2 192.168.254.253 2880  
IF Default Gateway DNS Address  
192.168.254.254 134.141.72.219  
WINS Address Domain Name  
134.141.70.34 ctron.com  
1
DHCP Client Status:  
IF MAC Address  
#
Net Address  
Time Left Name  
1
2
1
1
00:a0:c9:39:5e:40 192.168.254.2  
00:00:1d:16:71:99 192.168.254.3  
22980  
22980  
crotty  
slowhand  
dhcp  
192  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
nat:  
Syntax:  
nat <options>  
Description:  
The nat command provides status relating to Network Address  
Translation. Allows the user to assign a private network to an interface,  
to define an interface to access the internet through, and to create a public  
IP address to be used on the internet. Allows the user to assign a host on  
the private network as a “proxy server” accessible from the internet.  
Options:  
nat (with no options) displays status information  
nat enable/disable Enables or disables the NAT feature.  
nat config <PRIVATEIFNUM> <PUBLICIFNUM> Selects the local  
and public interfaces.  
nat proxy add <ENTRY_NUMBER> <PRIVATEIP>  
<PUBLICPORT> <LOCALPORT> <PROTOCOL> Adds a proxy  
server  
nat proxy delete <ENTRY_NUMBER> Deletes a proxy server  
Example:  
MIBNav->nat  
NAT Status:  
Admin: Enabled Oper: Enabled Local Interface: 1 Internet Interface: 2  
Local IP  
Local mask  
Internet IP  
Internet mask  
192.168.254.254 255.255.255.0 134.141.17.165 255.255.0.0  
Connections- TCP: 0, UDP: 0, ICMP: 0  
Local to inet- pkts: 116, bytes: 10814  
Inet to local- pkts: 91, bytes: 39812  
Errors: cksum: 0, retries: 1, bad packets: 0  
Total IP pkts: 3917, Reserved addresses: 2919  
Server List:  
Connections: #  
# Number of valid entries: 0  
nat  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
netstat:  
Syntax:  
netstat <option>  
Description:  
The netstat command provides a display of general network statistics for  
the managed device. The netstat command must be used with one of the  
two display options.  
Options:  
-i Display status and capability information for each interface  
-r Display routing information for each interface  
Example:  
MIBNav-> netstat -i  
Speed  
Interface + Description  
Admin Oper MAC Addr  
MTU  
10000000  
10000000  
10000000  
10000000  
# 1 (ethernet -csmacd)  
# 2 (ethernet - csmacd)  
# 3 (ethernet - csmacd)  
# 4 (ethernet - csmacd)  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
0x00 0x00 0x1d 0x07 0x50 0x0e  
0x00 0x00 0x1d 0x07 0x50 0x0f  
0x00 0x00 0x1d 0x07 0x50 0x10  
0x00 0x00 0x1d 0x07 0x50 0x11  
1514  
1514  
1514  
1514  
MIBNav-> netstat -r  
Destination  
Interface  
Next-hop  
# Default Route  
# 134.141.0.0  
# 134.141.0.0  
1
2
3
DirectConnection  
DirectConnection  
DirectConnection  
051470  
ping:  
Syntax:  
ping [IP address]  
Description:  
The ping command generates an outbound ping request to check the  
status (alive/not alive) of a device at a specified IP address.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> ping 122.144.40.10  
122.144.40.10 is alive  
051471  
194  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
snmpbranch:  
Syntax:  
snmpbranch [IP address] [community name] [OID]  
Description:  
The snmpbranch command enables you to query another SNMP device.  
The command provides a display of objects that match the specified  
OID. If no match is made, no object is displayed.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> snmpbranch 2.4.8.1 public 1.3.6.2.1.1  
EMRev X.X.X.X  
1.3.6.1.4.1.52  
8098654  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/1 sysDescr  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/2 sysObjectId  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/3 sysUpTime  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/4 sysContact  
STRING  
OBJECT ID  
TIME TICKS  
STRING  
AlZwie/MIS  
051473  
snmpget:  
Syntax:  
snmpget [IP address] [community name] [OID]  
Description:  
The snmpget command enables you to query another SNMP device to  
obtain a value for a specified object. This command requires the  
appropriate community string and object id.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> snmpget 22.44.61.22 public 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0  
# Cabletron EMME Revision X.XX.XX  
051474  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
snmpset:  
Syntax:  
snmpset [IP address] [community name]  
Description:  
The snmpset command enables you to set the value of an object in other  
SNMP devices. This command requires the appropriate community  
string and OID.  
When defining a new leaf set, MIB Navigator asks for a value. The  
following lists possible value types:  
(i)nteger - number  
(c)ounter - number  
(g)auge - number  
(t)ime ticks - number  
o(p)aque - “value” (with quotation marks)  
(s)tring - “value” (with quotation marks)  
(o)id - OID number with dotted punctuation  
(a)ddress - IP address in DDN format  
(m)ac - MAC address in hexadecimal format  
(n)ull - no type  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> snmpset 122.44.1.2 public  
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0 "Cyrus/MIS"  
051475  
196  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
snmptree:  
Syntax:  
snmptree [IP address] [community name]  
Description:  
The snmptree command provides a display of all objects in the device  
and their corresponding values.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> snmptree 122.144.89.10 public  
EMRev X.X.X.X  
1.3.6.1.4.1.52  
8098654  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/1 sysDescr  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/2 sysObjectId  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/3 sysUpTime  
# /1/3/6/1/2/1/1/4 sysContact  
STRING  
OBJECT ID  
TIME TICKS  
STRING  
AlZwie/MIS  
051476  
traceroute:  
Syntax:  
traceroute [IP address]  
Description:  
The traceroute command generates a TRACEROUTE request to a  
specified IP address and provides a display of all next-hop routers in the  
path to the device. If the device is not reached, the command displays all  
next-hop routers to the point of failure.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> traceroute 122.144.11.52  
# next-hop[1] 122.144.61.45  
# next-hop[2] 122.144.8.113  
051477  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
bridge:  
Syntax:  
bridge <ENABLE/DISABLE> <IFNUM/ALL>  
Description:  
Allows management of bridging upon one or more interfaces of the  
device. Bridging may be enabled or disabled at your request, either one  
at a time or all at once. Specifying a single interface number affects the  
bridging status of that interface, while specifying ALL affects every  
interface of the device.  
Options:  
<ENABLE/DISABLE> Enables or disables bridging.  
<IFNUM/ALL> Allows you to specify an interface number.  
Example:  
MIBNav-> bridge disable all  
bridge enable 1  
bridge disable 1  
bridge  
198  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
circuitmap:  
Syntax:  
circuitmap -a <PROTOCOL>  
circuitmap -f <PROTOCOL>  
circuitmap -d <PROTOCOL> <INTERFACENUM>  
<NETADDRESS> <MACADDRESS>  
circuitmap -s <PROTOCOL> <INTERFACENUM>  
<NETADDRESS> <MACADDRESS> <CIRCUIT>  
Description:  
Allows the user to view and/or modify a Protocol’s Circuit Map (i.e.,  
address-to-circuit) table for the device. The -a option shows the user the  
current Host Map information for the device. The -d option allows the  
user to delete an entry from the table. The -s option allows the user to  
insert a static entry into the table. The -f option allows the user to flush  
the table. The device must be initialized after changing the Circuit Map.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> circuitmap -s IPX 2 00000172 00:00:1d:02:d1:7a 102  
MIBNav-> circuitmap -a  
# Interface  
# 2  
Network  
5A4C212B  
Node  
00:00:1d:23:a1:5b  
Circuit ID  
203  
00:00:1d:23:a1:5b  
00000172  
102  
# 2  
circuitmap  
ppp:  
Syntax:  
ppp  
Description:  
Provides additional status relating to PPP and its Network Control  
Protocols.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
reset:  
Syntax:  
reset  
Description:  
The reset command allows you to perform a soft reset of the device. The  
user is queried to confirm the reset command to insure against unwanted  
resets.  
Note: The MIB Navigator’s connection to the device is terminated upon  
execution of this command.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
route:  
Syntax:  
route add <IPADDRESS> <IPADDRESS> <INTERFACENUM>  
route add <IPADDRESS> <IPADDRESS> <INTERFACENUM>  
<METRIC>  
route delete <IPADDRESS> <IPADDRESS> <INTERFACENUM>  
Description:  
Allows you to add or delete static entries in the IP Forwarding Table for  
the device. The first address is the destination. The second address is the  
next hop for the given interface. The metric value is optional. If included,  
it is used to set the value of ipForwardingMetric1. When RIP is used,  
the metric specifies the distance in hops to the destination.  
secondIP:  
Syntax:  
secondIP add <IPADDRESS> <INTERFACENUM>  
secondIP delete <IPADDRESS> <INTERFACENUM>  
Allows you to add or delete secondary IP addresses on the interface.  
Not Applicable  
Description:  
Options:  
200  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
show:  
Syntax:  
show <PROTOCOL> [TABLE]  
Description:  
The show command displays information concerning various  
components of the device. Protocols currently supported are IP and IPX.  
Components of those protocols that are currently supported are ARP  
caches, route tables, FIB tables, server tables, and interface tables. The  
number of valid entries in the table is outputted at the end of the table  
display.  
Example:  
MIBNav-> show IP ARP  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
# Interface  
MediaType  
Physical Address  
NetworkAddress  
# 4  
00:00:1d:04:40:5d  
08:00:20:0e:d8:31  
(dynamic)  
(dynamic)  
203  
102  
# 4  
show  
snmpnext:  
Syntax:  
snmpnext [IPADDRESS] [COMMUNITY-STRING] [OBJECT-ID]  
Description:  
The snmpnext command allows the user to query another device using  
SNMP. The next leaf of an object identifier can be retrieved from that  
device by supplying an appropriate community string and the values of  
the object identifier.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> snmpnext 132.111.22.33 public 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2  
#1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.3 sysUpTime  
Time Ticks 5490075  
snmpnext  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
imux:  
Syntax:  
imux <options>  
Description:  
This function lets you balance your LAN traffic between two T1 WAN  
ports and is used with Point to Point Protocol (PPP). When you select  
Inverse Multiplexing via QuickSET, bridging, IP routing, and IPX  
routing functions are all disabled. The WAN device at the other end of  
the WAN link(s) must be a Cabletron Systems device, capable of  
receiving the balanced WAN traffic. The imux command with no options  
displays the status information.  
Options:  
-ea enables the Inverse Multiplexer Application.  
-da disables the Inverse Multiplexer Application.  
-eg <GROUPID> enables the Inverse Multiplexer group designated by  
<GROUPID>.  
-dg <GROUPID> disables the Inverse Multiplexer group designated by  
<GROUPID>.  
-ac <GROUPID> <INTERFACENUM> Adds the WAN channel  
designated by <INTERFACENUM> to the Inverse Multiplexer group  
designated by <GROUPID>.  
-dc <GROUPID> <INTERFACENUM> Deletes the WAN channel  
designated by <INTERFACENUM> from the Inverse Multiplexer group  
designated by <GROUPID>.  
<GROUPID> A unique value identifying an element in a sequence of  
groups which belong to the WAN Inverse Multiplexer Application.  
<INTERFACENUM> The MIB II ifIndex value used to represent a  
WAN channel that has an appropriate datalink protocol associated with  
it.  
Example:  
MIBNav-> imux  
WAN Inverse Multiplexer Status:  
WAN  
Xmit Byte Count  
(bytes)  
Available BW  
(Kbits/sec)  
Physical Number  
Group ID  
Channel ID  
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1
1
1
1536000  
291483387  
1
2
2
1536000  
292249652  
Number of WAN Inverse Multiplexer Groups currenly programmed: 1  
Number of WAN Inverse Multiplexer Channels currenly programmed: 2  
imux  
202  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIB Navigator  
Special Commands  
done, quit, exit:  
Syntax:  
done  
Description:  
These commands enable you to exit from the MIB Navigator and return  
to the Main Menu screen.  
Options:  
Not Applicable  
Example:  
MIBNav-> done  
Connection closed  
051472  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIB Navigator  
204  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Troubleshooting  
Use this chapter in conjunction with the LANVIEW status monitoring and diagnostic LEDs on the  
CSX400 to diagnose power failures, collisions, cable faults and link problems. Figure 77 shows  
the front panel LEDs. Table 24, Table 25, Table 26, Table 27, and Table 28 describe LED states.  
If you are having difficulty installing and configuring the CSX400, perform the following steps:  
•
•
•
Review the CSX400 QuickSTART Guide to insure proper installation.  
Check that all cables and connectors have been attached properly.  
Verify that power has been applied to the CSX400.  
Receive  
Transmit  
Collision  
Power  
CPU  
Transmit  
Receive  
Link  
Status 1  
Status 2  
Test  
Figure 77 CSX400 Front Panel LED  
Table 24 CSX400 Hardware LED States  
LED  
Color  
State  
OFF  
Power off  
Power (PWR)  
GREEN  
OFF  
Power on  
Power off  
Processor (CPU)  
RED  
Fault condition detected  
GREEN (blinking) NORMAL  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
LED  
Table 25 CSX400 LAN LED States  
Color  
State  
OFF  
Port Enabled, No Activity  
Receive (RCV)  
AMBER (flashing) Receiving traffic  
OFF  
NORMAL  
Collision (CLN)  
Link (LNK)  
RED  
Collision  
OFF  
Power Off or Failure  
NORMAL, link exists  
GREEN  
Table 26 CSX400 WAN LED States  
LED  
Color  
State  
OFF  
Not transmitting traffic  
Transmitting traffic  
Transmit (XMT)  
Receive (RCV)  
GREEN (flashing)  
OFF  
Not receiving traffic  
Receiving traffic  
AMBER (flashing)  
OFF  
WPIM not configured  
NORMAL, link exists  
Link exists in STANDBY  
WPIM configured, link does not exist  
NORMAL  
GREEN  
AMBER  
RED  
Link (LNK)  
Test  
OFF  
Power-up diagnostics  
Loopback testing  
AMBER (flashing)  
206 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Table 27 CSX400 WAN LED States for STS 1  
WPIM  
Color  
State  
OFF  
Normal or port disabled  
Red alarm  
T1, DI, and E1  
RED  
OFF  
Normal or port disabled  
Out of service (OOS)  
Inactive or disabled  
Request to send (RTS)  
DDS  
AMBER  
OFF  
SYNC  
GREEN  
OFF  
Port disabled or in loopback mode  
Loop 1 not synchronized, in T1 and  
Fractional T1 mode  
HDSL  
S/T  
RED  
GREEN  
OFF  
Loop 1 synchronized  
B1 not active or port disabled  
B1 active  
GREEN  
Table 28 CSX400 WAN LED States for STS 2  
WPIM  
Color  
State  
OFF  
Normal or port disabled  
Yellow alarm  
T1, D1, and E1  
DDS  
AMBER  
OFF  
Normal or port disabled  
Inactive or disabled  
Clear to send (CTS)  
OFF  
SYNC  
GREEN  
Port disabled, in Loopback mode, or  
Fractional T1 mode  
OFF  
HDSL  
S/T  
RED  
Loop 2 not synchronized (T1 mode only)  
Loop 2 synchronized (T1 mode only)  
B2 not active or port disabled  
B2 active  
GREEN  
OFF  
GREEN  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting CSX400 Hardware  
Power (PWR) LED is OFF  
•
Check that the power connection is firmly attached to the back panel of the CSX400, and the  
other end to an active power source.  
Processor (CPU) LED is OFF  
If the CPU stays OFF for an extended amount of time, and the power (PWR) light remains on, the  
CPU is in an unknown state.  
•
Contact Cabletron Systems Global Call Center for technical support (refer to Getting Help in  
Chapter 1).  
Processor (CPU) LED is RED  
The processor has detected a fault condition.  
•
Contact Cabletron Systems Technical Support (refer to Getting Help in Chapter 1).  
Troubleshooting the LAN  
Collision (CLN) LED is RED  
Collisions are normal in an Ethernet network, however, increased collisions may indicate that the  
network is out of specification (the propagation delay between two nodes on the network exceeds  
25.6 µs).  
Link (LNK) LED is OFF  
•
•
•
•
Check that the CSX400 and the device at the other end of the segment are powered up.  
Verify that the RJ45 connectors on the twisted pair segment have the correct pinouts.  
Check the cable for continuity.  
Check that the cable meets the specifications for dB loss.  
208 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting the WAN  
Link (LNK) LED is OFF  
The WAN interface is not configured for operation.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface is configured  
correctly.  
Link (LNK) LED is RED  
The WAN interface is configured, but there is no signal indicating that a valid connection is present  
on the WAN interface.  
•
•
Check that the CSX400 and the device at the other end of the segment are powered up.  
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that both WAN interfaces, local and remote,  
are configured correctly.  
•
•
•
Check to ensure that the correct cable is being used.  
Check to ensure that the cable has continuity and is fully installed.  
Check with the WAN Service Provider to ensure that the circuit has been configured by them  
and is active.  
Link (LNK) LED is AMBER  
The port is in Standby mode.  
•
•
Check with the Network Administrator to see if management placed the port in Standby mode.  
Ensure that the protocol that you want to run has been properly selected at both ends and the  
time slots have been allocated if applicable.  
Status 1 (STS1) LED is OFF  
WPIM-T1, WPIM-E1, WPIM-DI, or WPIM-DDS Installed in CSX400  
The port is operating normally. If it is not, and this LED is OFF the port may be disabled.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Local device  
is configured correctly.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
WPIM-SYNC Installed in CSX400  
The port is operating normally. If it is not, and this LED is OFF the port may be disabled or RTS  
may be inactive.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Local device  
is configured correctly.  
WPIM-HDSL Installed in CSX400  
The port is disabled or has been placed into Loopback Test mode.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Local device  
is configured correctly.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Remote  
device is configured correctly.  
WPIM-S/T Installed in CSX400  
The port is operating normally and ISDN BRI channels B1 and B2 are not active. If it is not, and  
this LED is always OFF, the port may be disabled.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Local device  
is configured correctly.  
Status 1 (STS1) LED is RED  
WPIM-T1, WPIM-E1, or WPIM-DI Installed in CSX400 is in RED Alarm Mode  
A RED alarm indicates that the WAN connection is not receiving proper framing or has lost  
framing.  
•
•
•
Verify the use of proper cabling on the WAN connection.  
Check Frame Type selection on the WAN Physical Configuration and line coding.  
Possible bad cabling between Telco and CSX400.  
210 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
WPIM-HDSL Installed in CSX400  
WPIM-HDSL is configured for either Full or Fractional T1 and the WPIM is not able to establish  
synchronization on Loop 1 with the remote HDSL circuit.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to verify that one of the WPIM-HDSLs is involved in the  
connection is set to Master (Local) Timing and that the other one is set to Slave (Loop) Timing.  
•
Verify the use of proper cabling for the HDSL connections. Category 3 or Category 5  
Unshielded Twisted Pair copper wiring is required. One pair (2 wires) for Fractional T1, two  
pair (4 wires) for Full T1. The presence of bridged taps and multiple wire segments connected  
together to form the loop may reduce the maximum distance usable between the Remote and  
Local devices. Wire gauge has an impact on the distance which can be supported as well. The  
maximum distance is 12,000 feet using 24 AWG wiring.  
•
•
Verify the gauge and condition of the wire. A trained line technician may be necessary to  
determine this.  
Verify that the distance between the Remote and Local units is less than 12,000 Feet.  
Status 1 (STS1) LED is AMBER  
WPIM-DDS Installed in CSX400  
The DDS circuit is Out of Service (OOS).  
•
Contact your WAN DDS Service Provider and have them test the operation of your DDS circuit.  
Status 1 (STS1) LED is GREEN  
WPIM-SYNC Installed in CSX400  
The Port is operating normally; Request to Send (RTS) has been activated by your WAN device. If  
it is not, use the following steps:  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the local device  
is configured properly.  
•
Verify the cabling being used between the CSX400 and the CSU/DSU.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
WPIM-HDSL is installed in CSX400  
The Port is operating normally, Loop 1 has synchronized with the HDSL circuit at the remote end.  
WPIM-S/T is installed in CSX400  
The Port is operating normally, ISDN BRI channel B1 or B2 or both are active.  
Status 2 (STS2) LED is OFF  
WPIM-T1, WPIM-E1, WPIM-DI, or WPIM-DDS Installed in CSX400  
The port is operating normally. If it is not, and this LED is OFF the port may be disabled.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Local device  
is configured correctly.  
WPIM-SYNC Installed in CSX400  
The port is operating normally. If it is not, and this LED is OFF the port may be disabled or CTS  
may be inactive from the CSU/DSU connected to the CSX400.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Local device  
is configured correctly.  
WPIM-HDSL Installed in CSX400  
The port is in Fractional T1 mode and is operating normally. If it is not, the port is disabled or has  
been placed into Loopback Test mode.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Local device  
is configured correctly.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Remote  
device is configured correctly.  
WPIM-S/T Installed in CSX400  
The port is operating normally and ISDN BRI channel B2 is not active. If it is not, and this LED is  
always OFF, the port may be disabled.  
•
Use QuickSET or Local Management to make sure that the WAN interface on the Local device  
is configured correctly.  
212 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Status 2 (STS 2) LED is RED WPIM-HDSL Installed in CSX400  
WPIM-HDSL is configured for either Full T1 and the WPIM is not able to establish  
synchronization on Loop 2 with the remote HDSL circuit.  
•
Verify using QuickSET of Local Management that one of the WPIM-HDSL is involved in the  
connection is set to Master (Local) Timing and that the other one is set to Slave (Loop) Timing.  
•
Verify the use of proper cabling for the HDSL connections. Category 3 or Category 5  
Unshielded Twisted Pair copper wiring is required. One pair (2 wires) for Fractional T1, two  
pair (4 wires) for Full T1. The presence of bridged taps and multiple wire segments connected  
together to form the loop may reduce the maximum distance usable between the Remote and  
Local devices. Wire gauge has an impact on the distance which can be supported as well. The  
maximum distance is 12,000 feet using 24 AWG wiring.  
•
•
Verify the gauge and condition of the wire. A trained line technician may be necessary to  
determine this.  
Verify that the distance between the Remote and Local units is less than 12,000 Feet.  
Status 2 (STS2) LED is AMBER  
WPIM-T1, WPIM-E1, or WPIM-DI Installed in CSX400  
The device is in Yellow alarm mode. A Yellow alarm indicates that the CSX400 is  
receiving proper framing from the Telco, but the Telco is not receiving proper framing.  
•
•
Check for faulty or incorrect cabling between Telco and CSX400.  
Request that the Telco verify the configuration and operation of the circuit.  
Status 2 (STS2) LED is GREEN  
WPIM-SYNC Installed in CSX400  
The Port is operating normally, Clear to Send (CTS) has been received by your WAN device.  
•
If it is not, check STS 1 to determine if the Port is Sending a Request to Send (RTS) to the CSU/  
DSU it is connected to.  
•
•
Verify the cabling being used between the CSX400 and the CSU/DSU.  
Check the CSU/DSU for proper operation.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
WPIM-HDSL Installed in CSX400  
The port is operating normally, Loop 2 has synchronized with the HDSL circuit at the remote end  
(Full T1 mode only).  
WPIM-S/T Installed in CSX400  
The port is operating normally, ISDN BRI channel B2 is active.  
Test (TST) LED is AMBER (blinking)  
The device is in test mode.  
•
•
The CSX400 is running its Power-up Diagnostic Tests.  
Loopback Testing is underway on a WAN circuit.  
Investigating Software Configuration Problems  
Software problems usually occur when your software configuration contains incomplete or  
incorrect information.  
Connection to Device Fails During Software Configuration  
•
For a LAN connection, verify that the IP address matches the IP address previously stored into  
the configuration of the router. You must have previously (through QuickSET) set the Ethernet  
LAN IP address and Subnet Mask, enabled IP routing, saved the Ethernet configuration changes  
and rebooted the router for the new IP address to take effect.  
•
•
Check that your LAN cable is wired correctly and each end securely plugged in.  
Make sure that an IP route exists between your local PC and the CSX400. The PC and CSX400  
must be on the same IP subnetwork or the CSX400 must be reachable through a router on your  
LAN.  
•
Check Network TCP/IP properties under Windows 95 or Windows NT, as described in the  
Read Me First! document.  
214 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
User Cannot Communicate with Remote Network Station  
If Bridging,  
•
•
•
Check that the Bridging Default Destination is set.  
Check that bridging to/from the remote router is set on.  
Be sure to reboot if you have made any bridging destination or control changes.  
If TCP/IP Routing,  
•
•
Check that TCP/IP Routing is set on and is enabled at the remote end.  
Check that the IP address of the LAN beyond the remote router is correct, as well as the  
associated Subnet Mask.  
•
If the remote router WAN IP address and Subnet Mask are required, check that they have been  
specified correctly.  
•
•
•
Check that, if required, the source and remote WAN IP addresses are on the subnetwork.  
Check that you have seeded the routing table, if RIP is not allowed to flow on the WAN link.  
Be sure to reboot if you have made any IP address, control or protocol option changes.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
216 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
EPIM Specifications  
Introduction  
The CSX400 provides two ports for Cabletron Systems EPIMs. EPIMs allow connection to the  
main network using different media types. The following sections explain the specifications of the  
variety of EPIMs Cabletron Systems offers.  
EPIM-T  
The EPIM-T is an RJ45 connector supporting UTP cabling. It has an internal Cabletron Systems  
TPT-T 10BASE-T Twisted Pair Transceiver.  
The slide switch on the EPIM-T determines the crossover status of the cable pairs. If the switch is  
on the X side, the pairs are internally crossed over. If the switch is on the = side, the pairs are not  
internally crossed over. Figure 78 shows the pinouts for the EPIM-T in both crossover positions.  
Position X  
(crossed over)  
1. RX+  
2. RX-  
3. TX+  
4. NC  
5. NC  
6. TX-  
7. NC  
8. NC  
Position =  
(not crossed over)  
1. TX+  
2. TX-  
3. RX+  
4. NC  
5. NC  
6. RX-  
7. NC  
8. NC  
Figure 78 EPIM-T Pinouts  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EPIM Specifications  
EPIM-F1 and EPIM-F2  
The EPIM-F1 and EPIM-F2 support Multimode Fiber Optic cabling. Each EPIM has an internal  
Cabletron Systems FOT-F Fiber Optic Transceiver. The EPIM-F1 is equipped with SMA  
Connectors and the EPIM-F2 is equipped with ST Connectors. Figure 79 shows both EPIMs.  
Specifications for the EPIMs are listed in Table 29.  
Figure 79 EPIM-F1 and EPIM-F2  
Table 29 EPIM-F1 & EPIM-F2 Specifications  
Worst  
Parameter  
Typical Value  
Case  
Receive  
Sensitivity  
-30.5 dBm  
-7.6 dBm  
-28.0 dBm  
Peak Input  
Power  
-8.2 dBm  
Table 30 provides transmitter power parameters.  
218 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
EPIM Specifications  
Table 30 Transmitter Power  
Worst  
Case  
Budget  
Worst  
Typical Value  
Typical  
Budget  
Parameter  
Case  
50/125 µm fiber  
62.5/125 µm fiber  
100/140 µm fiber  
Error Rate  
-13.0 dBm  
-15.0 dBm  
-12.0 dBm  
-9.0 dBm  
13.0 dB  
16.0 dB  
19.0 dB  
17.5 dB  
20.5 dB  
23.5 dB  
-10.0 dBm  
-7.0 dBm  
Better than 10-10  
The transmitter power levels and receive sensitivity levels listed are Peak Power Levels  
after optical overshoot. A Peak Power Meter must be used to correctly compare the  
values given above to those measured on any particular port. If Power Levels are being  
measured with an Average Power Meter, then 3 dBm must be added to the  
measurement to correctly compare those measured values to the values listed  
(i.e., -30.5 dBm peak = -33.5 dBm average).  
NOTE  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EPIM Specifications  
EPIM-F3  
The EPIM-F3 supports Single Mode Fiber Optic cabling. It has an internal Cabletron Systems  
FOT-F Fiber Optic Transceiver and is equipped with ST Connectors. Figure 80 shows the  
EPIM-F3. Specifications for the EPIM-F3 are listed in Table 31.  
Figure 80 EPIM-F3  
Transmitter Power decreases as temperatures rise and increases as temperatures fall.  
Use the Output Power Coefficient to calculate increased or decreased power output for  
NOTE  
your operating environment. For example, the typical power output at 25°C is  
-16.4 dBm. For a 4°C temperature increase, multiply the typical coefficient (-0.15 dBm)  
by four and add the result to typical output power (4 x -0.15 dBm + -16.4 = -17.0).  
Table 31 EPIM-F3 Specifications  
Parameter  
Typical  
Minimum  
Maximum  
Transmitter Peak Wave Length  
Spectral Width  
Rise Time  
1300 nm  
60 nm  
1270 nm  
–
1330 nm  
100 nm  
5.0 nsec  
5.0 nsec  
50.7%  
3.0 nsec  
2.5 nsec  
50.1%  
2.7 nsec  
2.2 nsec  
49.6%  
Fall Time  
Duty Cycle  
Bit Error Rate  
Better than 10-10  
The transmitter power levels given above are Peak Power Levels after optical  
overshoot. You must use a Peak Power Meter to correctly compare the values given  
above to those measured on any particular port. If you are measuring power levels with  
an Average Power Meter, add 3 dBm to the average power measurement to correctly  
compare the average power values measured to the values listed above (i.e., -33.5  
dBm average + 3 dB = -30.5 dBm peak).  
NOTE  
220 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
EPIM Specifications  
EPIM-C  
The EPIM-C supports thin coaxial cabling and is equipped with an internal Cabletron Systems  
TMS-3 Transceiver. You can use the TERM switch on the front of the EPIM-C to set the internal  
50-ohm terminator. This eliminates the need to connect the port to a T-connector and terminator.  
Figure 81 shows the setting for the terminator switch.  
Internal Termination Switch  
= On (internally terminated)  
= Off (need external termination)  
Figure 81 EPIM-C  
Connector Type  
This connector type is a BNC receptacle with gold center contact for use with BNC type  
T-connectors and RG58 coaxial cable.  
Grounding  
For safety reasons, only one end of a coaxial segment should be connected to earth  
ground. Connection to earth ground at more than one point on the segment may  
cause dangerous ground currents.  
!
CAUTION  
The BNC port of the Coaxial Interface Modules is not connected to earth ground.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EPIM Specifications  
EPIM-A and EPIM-X (AUI Port)  
The EPIM-A is a DB15 female connector used to attach segments to an external transceiver. The  
EPIM-X is equipped with dual internal transceivers. It has a DB15 male connector used to attach  
segments to an AUI cable. Figure 82 shows both modules and Table 32 provides the DB15  
pinouts.  
The EPIM-A is equipped with a fuse (F1) to protect against risk of fire. For continued  
protection against the risk of fire, replace fuse F1only with the same type and rating of  
fuse (1A, F250V).  
!
CAUTION  
Figure 82 The EPIM-A and EPIM-X  
Table 32 DB15 Pinouts  
Pin Number  
Represents  
Pin Number  
Represents  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
Logic Ref.  
10  
Transmit -  
Collision +  
Transmit +  
Logic Ref.  
11  
Logic Ref.  
12  
Receive -  
13  
Power (+12Vdc)  
Logic Ref.  
Receive +  
14  
Power Return  
No Connection  
Collision -  
15  
No Connection  
Positive Ground  
Connector Shell  
222 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
B
WPIM Cable Specifications  
For all WPIM cables, there is part number information for ordering a standard 20-foot  
cable or a specified length of cable. The number 20 followed by the part number  
denotes the standard 20-foot cable.The letter “L” denotes the specified length required  
in feet or meters. For example: 9372095-3 denotes a 3 foot cable; 9372095-3M  
denotes a 3-meter cable.  
NOTE  
WPIM-T1  
This section provides the Cabletron Systems part number and connector specifications for  
WPIM-T1 interface cables.  
Table 33 provides connector type and part number information.  
Table 33 T-1 Interface Cable Part Numbers  
Connector Type  
Part Number  
RJ48C  
9372094  
Table 34 provides RJ48 connector pin assignments.  
Table 34 T-1 Connector Pin Assignments  
Pin Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Not Used  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Not Used  
Shield Ground  
Shield Ground  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
Table 35 provides RJ48 DTE pin assignments.  
Table 35 DTE Pin Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Not Used  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Not Used  
Shield Ground  
Shield Ground  
Table 36 provides RJ48 network pin assignments.  
Table 36 Network Pin Assignments  
Pin Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Not Used  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
224  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
WPIM-SY  
This section provides the Cabletron Systems part number and connector specifications for the  
WPIM-SY interface cables.  
Table 37 provides the cable and interface types, electrical types, and part numbers for the  
WPIM-SY.  
Table 37 WPIM-SY Interface Cables  
Cable and Interface Type  
Electrical Type  
Part Number  
RS449  
RS422  
V.35  
9380120  
9380121  
9380122  
9380123  
9380124  
9380125  
9380126  
9380127  
V.35  
RS232  
RS232  
X.21  
X.21  
RS530  
RS422  
RS422  
RS422  
RS422  
RS530 ALT A  
RS530A  
RS530A ALT A  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WPIM Cable Specifications  
EIA-449  
Table 38 shows the connector number, cable assembly description, and connector type.  
Table 38 EIA-449 Interface  
Connector Number  
Cable Assembly Description Connector Type  
1
2
Sub DB 26-pin male connector  
DB-37 pin male connector  
EIA-530A ALT A to EIA-449  
Table 39 provides pin assignments for the EIA-449 interface cable.  
Table 39 EIA-449 Interface Cable Pin Assignment  
Connector 1 EIA-530A ALT A  
DIRECT  
Connector 2 EIA-449  
PAIR  
DIRECT  
TO  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
PIN  
PIN  
NAME  
MNEMONIC  
TO  
Transmit Data A  
Transmit Data B  
Receive Data A  
Receive Data B  
Clear to Send A  
Clear to Send B  
Request to Send A  
Request to Send B  
2
14  
3
4
22  
6
Send Data A  
Send Data B  
BA  
BB  
CB  
CA  
DB  
DD  
DA  
DCE  
A
B
C
D
E
F
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
SD  
RD  
CS  
RS  
ST  
RT  
TT  
Receive Data A  
Receive Data B  
Clear to Send A  
16  
5
24  
9
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
13  
4
27 Clear to Send B  
Request to Send A  
25 Request to Send B  
7
19  
Transmit Signal Timing A 15  
Transmit Signal Timing B 12  
Receive Signal Timing A 17  
5
23  
8
Send Timing A  
Send Timing B  
Receive Timing A  
Receive Signal Timing B  
9
26 Receive Timing B  
17 Terminal Timing A  
35 Terminal Timing B  
Transmit Signal Timing A 24  
Transmit Signal Timing B 11  
G
226  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
Table 39 EIA-449 Interface Cable Pin Assignment (Continued)  
Connector 1 EIA-530A ALT A  
DIRECT  
Connector 2 EIA-449  
PAIR  
DIRECT  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
PIN  
PIN  
NAME  
TO  
MNEMONIC  
TO  
CE  
TM  
CC  
CD  
Ring Indicator  
Test Mode  
22  
25  
6
15  
18  
11  
12  
Incoming Call  
Test Mode  
IC  
TM  
DM  
TR  
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
DCE Ready  
DTE Ready  
SHIELD  
Data Mode  
20  
1
Terminal Ready  
AC  
AB  
Signal Common  
23  
20 Receive Common  
19 Send Common  
30 Terminal Ready B  
37 Signal Ground  
RC  
SG  
TR_B  
SC  
Signal Common  
7
V.35  
Table 40 shows the connector number, cable assembly description, and connector type.  
Table 40 V.35 Interface  
Connector Number  
Cable Assembly Description  
Connector Type  
1
2
Sub DB 26-pin male  
M Series 34-pin male  
EIA-530A ALT A to V.35  
Table 41 provides pin assignments for the V.35 interface cable.  
Table 41 V.35 Interface Cable Pin Assignment  
Connector 1 EIA-530A ALT A Connector 2 V.35  
PAIR  
DIRECT  
TO  
DIRECT  
TO  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
PIN  
PIN  
NAME  
MNEMONIC  
103  
Transmit Data A  
Transmit Data B  
Receive Data A  
Receive Data B  
Clear to Send A  
Request to Send A  
2
14  
3
P
S
R
T
Transmit Data A  
Transmit Data B  
Receive Data A  
Receive Data B  
Ready to Send A  
BA  
BB  
DCE  
A
B
DCE  
DTE  
104  
DTE  
DCE  
16  
5
CB  
CA  
C
D
D
C
106  
105  
4
Request to Send A DCE  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
Table 41 V.35 Interface Cable Pin Assignment (Continued)  
Connector 1 EIA-530A ALT A Connector 2 V.35  
PAIR  
DIRECT  
TO  
DIRECT  
TO  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
PIN  
PIN  
NAME  
MNEMONIC  
Transmit Signal  
Timing A  
Transmitter Signal  
Timing A  
15  
12  
17  
9
Y
AA  
V
DB  
E
114  
Transmit Signal  
Timing B  
Transmitter Signal  
Timing B  
DTE  
DTE  
Receive Signal  
Timing A  
Receiver Signal  
Timing A  
DD  
DA  
F
115  
113  
Receive Signal  
Timing B  
Receiver Signal  
Timing B  
X
Transmit Signal  
Timing A  
Transmitter Signal  
Timing A  
24  
11  
U
DCE  
DTE  
G
DCE  
DTE  
Transmit Signal  
Timing B  
Transmitter Signal  
Timing B  
W
CE  
TM  
CC  
Ring Indicator  
Test Mode  
22  
25  
6
J
NN  
E
Calling Indicator  
Test Indicator  
125  
142  
107  
DCE Ready  
Data Set Ready  
Data Terminal  
Ready  
CD  
DTE Ready  
20  
H
108  
DCE  
Loopback  
Maintenance  
DCE  
RL  
LL  
Remote Loopback 21  
N
L
140  
141  
Local Loopback  
SHIELD  
18  
1
Local Loopback  
DRAIN  
AC  
AB  
Signal Common  
Signal Common  
23  
7
B
B
Signal Common  
Signal Common  
102  
102  
228  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WPIM Cable Specifications  
EIA-232  
Table 42 shows the connector number, cable assembly description, and connector type.  
Table 42 EIA-232 Interface  
Connector Number  
Cable Assembly Description  
Connector Type  
1
2
Sub DB 26-pin male  
DB-25 pin male  
EIA-530A ALT A to EIA-232  
Table 43 provides pin assignments for the EIA-232 interface cable.  
Table 43 EIA-232 Interface Cable Pin Assignment  
Connector 1 EIA-530A ALT A  
DIRECT  
Connector 2 EIA-232  
DIRECT  
TO  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
PIN PIN  
NAME  
MNEMONIC  
TO  
BA  
BB  
CB  
CA  
DCE  
Transmit Data  
Receive Data  
2
3
5
4
2
3
5
4
Transmit Data  
Receive Data  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
BA  
BB  
CB  
CA  
DTE  
DCE  
Clear to Send  
Request to Send  
Clear to Send  
Request to Send  
Transmitter Signal  
Timing  
DB  
DD  
Transmit Signal Timing 15 15  
Receive Signal Timing 17 17  
Transmit Signal Timing 24 24  
DB  
DD  
DTE  
DTE  
Receiver Signal  
Timing  
Transmitter Signal  
Timing  
DA  
CE  
RL  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DA  
CE  
RL  
Ring Indicator  
22 22  
21 21  
Ring Indicator  
Loopback  
Maintenance  
Remote Loopback  
DCE  
DCE  
LL  
TM  
CC  
CD  
Local Loopback  
Test Mode  
18 18  
25 25  
Local Loopback  
Test Indicator  
DCE Ready  
LL  
TM  
CC  
CD  
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
DCE Ready  
DTE Ready  
6
6
20 20  
1
DTE Ready  
SHIELD  
AC  
AB  
Signal Common  
Signal Common  
23  
7
7
7
Signal Common  
Signal Common  
AB  
AB  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
X.21  
Table 44 shows the connector number, cable assembly description, and connector type.  
Table 44 X.21 Interface  
Connector Number  
Cable Assembly Description  
Connector Type  
1
2
Sub DB 26-pin male  
DB-15 pin male  
EIA-530A ALT A to X.21  
Table 45 provides pin assignments for the X.21 interface cable.  
Table 45 X.21 Interface Cable Pin Assignment  
Connector 1 EIA-530A ALT A Connector 2 X.21  
PAIR  
DIRECT  
TO  
DIRECT  
TO  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
PIN  
PIN  
NAME  
MNEMONIC  
Transmit Data A  
Transmit Data B  
Receive Data A  
Receive Data B  
Clear to Send A  
Clear to Send B  
Request to Send A  
Request to Send B  
2
14  
3
2
9
Transmit A  
Transmit B  
Receive A  
Receive B  
Indication A  
Indication B  
Control A  
BA  
BB  
CB  
CA  
DCE  
DTE  
DTE  
DCE  
A
B
C
D
DCE  
DTE  
DTE  
DCE  
T
R
I
4
16  
5
11  
5
13  
4
12  
3
C
19  
10  
Control B  
Transmit SignalTiming A 17  
Receive Signal Timing A 15  
Signal Element  
Timing A  
6
DB  
DTE  
E
DTE  
S
Transmit SignalTiming B  
9
Signal Element  
Timing B  
13  
Receive Signal Timing B 12  
SHIELD  
1
7
DRAIN  
AC  
AB  
DTE Common  
DCE Common  
8
Signal Ground  
G
23  
230  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
EIA-530, EIA-530 ALT A, EIA-530 A, and EIA-530 A ALT A  
Table 46 shows the connector number, cable assembly description, and connector type for the  
EIA-530, EIA-530 ALT A, EIA-530A, and EIA-530A ALT A, interface cables.  
Table 46 EIA-530, EIA-530 ALT A, EIA-530A, and EIA-530A ALT A Interfaces  
Connector Number  
Cable Assembly Description  
Connector Type  
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
Sub DB 26-pin male  
DB 25-pin male  
EIA-530A ALT A to EIA-530  
Sub DB 26-pin male  
Sub DB26-pin male  
Sub DB 26-pin male  
DB 25-pin male  
EIA-530A ALT A to EIA-530 ALT A  
EIA-530A ALT A to EIA-530A  
Sub DB 26-pin male  
Sub DB 26-pin male  
EIA-530A ALT A to EIA -530A ALT A  
Table 47 provides the cable pin assignments for the EIA-530, EIA-530 ALT A, EIA-530A, and  
EIA-530A ALT A, interface cables.  
Table 47 EIA-530, EIA-530 ALT A, EIA-530A, and EIA-530A ALT A Interface Cable Pin Assignments  
Connector 1 EIA-530A ALT A  
DIRECT  
Connector 2 EIA-530  
PAIR  
DIRECT  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
PIN  
PIN  
NAME  
TO  
MNEMONIC  
TO  
Transmit Data A  
Transmit Data B  
Receive Data A  
Receive Data B  
Clear to Send A  
Clear to Send B  
Request to Send A  
Request to Send B  
2
14  
3
2
Transmit Data A  
BA  
BB  
CB  
CA  
DCE  
A
B
C
D
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
BA  
BB  
CB  
CA  
14 Transmit Data B  
3
16  
5
Receive Data A  
Receive Data B  
Clear to Send A  
16  
5
DTE  
DCE  
13  
4
13 Clear to Send B  
Request to Send A  
19 Request to Send B  
4
19  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
Table 47 EIA-530, EIA-530 ALT A, EIA-530A, and EIA-530A ALT A Interface Cable Pin Assignments  
Connector 1 EIA-530A ALT A  
DIRECT  
Connector 2 EIA-530  
PAIR  
E
DIRECT  
MNEMONIC  
NAME  
PIN  
PIN  
NAME  
TO  
MNEMONIC  
TO  
Transmit Signal  
Transmit Signal Timing A 15  
Transmit Signal Timing B 12  
Receive Signal Timing A 17  
15  
12  
17  
9
Timing A  
DB  
DD  
DA  
DB  
Transmit Signal  
Timing B  
DTE  
DTE  
Receive Signal  
Timing A  
F
DD  
DA  
Receive Signal  
Timing B  
Receive Signal Timing B  
9
Transmit Signal  
Timing A  
Transmit Signal Timing A 24  
Transmit Signal Timing B 11  
24  
11  
G
Transmit Signal  
Timing B  
DCE  
DCE  
RL  
LL  
Remote Loopback  
Local Loopback  
Test Mode  
21  
18  
25  
6
21 Remote Loopback  
RL  
LL  
18  
25  
6
Local Loopback  
Test Mode  
TM  
CC  
CD  
TM  
CC  
CD  
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
DCE Ready  
DCE Ready  
DTE Ready  
DTE Ready  
20  
1
20  
SHIELD  
DRAIN  
Signal Common  
AC  
Signal Common  
Signal Common  
Signal Common  
Ring Indicator  
23  
23  
7
7
AC  
AC  
AB  
CE  
a
AC  
AB  
23 Signal Common  
7
Signal Common  
Ring Indicator  
b
CE  
DTE  
22  
22  
DTE  
a. This pin assignment only applies to the EIA-530A ALT A interface cable.  
b. This pin assignment only applies to the EIA-530A and EIA-530A ALT A interface cables.  
232  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WPIM Cable Specifications  
WPIM-DDS  
This section provides Cabletron Systems part number and connector specifications for the  
WPIM-DDS interface cable. The WPIM-DDS has one RJ45 port for a direct connection to a single  
Digital Data Service (DDS) circuit.  
Table 48 provides cable and interface type, and part number information for the WPIM-DDS  
interface cable, and Table 49 provides network Pin Assignment information for the DDS interface  
cable.  
.
Table 48 DDS Interface Cable Part Number  
Cable and Interface Type  
Part Number  
DDS  
9360119  
Table 49 Network Pinout Assignments  
PIN  
SIGNAL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Receive Tip  
Receive Ring  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
WPIM-E1  
This section provides the Cabletron Systems part number and connector specifications for the  
WPIM-E1 interface cable.  
Table 50 shows the WPIM-E1 connector number, cable and interface type, connector type and part  
number information.  
Table 50 WPIM-E1 Connector Information  
Connector Number  
Cable and Interface Type  
Connector Type  
Part Number  
1
2
E1  
RJ45  
9372095  
Table 51 provides WPIM-E1 network interface cable pin assignments.  
Table 51 Network Interface  
Pin Signal  
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
1
2
Shield Ground  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Shield Ground  
Not Used  
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not Used  
234  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
Table 52 provides WPIM-E1 DTE interface cable pin assignments.  
Table 52 DTE Interface  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Shield Ground  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Shield Ground  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Table 53 provides WPIM-E1 RJ45 network interface cable pin assignments.  
Table 53 Network Interface  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Not Used  
2
3
4
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Not Used  
5
6
7
Not Used  
8
Not Used  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
WPIM-DI  
This section provides Cabletron Systems part number and connector specifications for the  
WPIM-DI interface cables.  
Table 54 shows the connector number, cable assembly description, cable and interface type,  
connector type and part number information for the WPIM-DI interface.  
Table 54 WPIM-DI Connector Information  
Connector  
Number  
Cable and  
Interface Type  
Connector  
Type  
Cable Assembly Description  
Part Number  
1
2
Network  
DI  
RJ48  
9372094  
Drop and Insert  
Table 55 provides the WPIM-DI network interface cable pin assignments.  
Table 55 WPIM-DI Network  
Pin Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
AC Coupled Ground  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
AC Coupled Ground  
AC Coupled Ground  
AC Coupled Ground  
236  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
Table 56 provides the WPIM-DI drop and insert interface cable pin assignments.  
Table 56 WPIM-DI Drop and Insert  
Pin Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
AC Coupled Ground  
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
AC Coupled Ground  
AC Coupled Ground  
AC Coupled Ground  
WPIM-HDSL  
This section provides connector specifications for the WPIM-HDSL interface cables. Table 57  
provides pin assignments for the RJ-45 network interface connector.  
Table 57 WPIM-HDSL Network Interface Cable Pin Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HDSL Loop 1 (Ring1)  
HDSL Loop 1 (Tip1)  
Not Used  
HDSL Loop 2 (Ring2)  
HDSL Loop 2 (Tip2)  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Chassis Ground  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
WPIM Cable Specifications  
WPIM-S/T  
This section provides connector specifications for the WPIM-S/T interface cable. Table 58  
provides pin assignments for the RJ-45 network interface connector.  
Table 58 WPIM-S/T Network Interface Cable Pin Assignments  
Pin  
Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not Used  
Not Used  
Transmit +  
Receive +  
Receive -  
Transmit -  
Not Used  
Not Used  
238  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Specifications and Standards Compliance  
This chapter contains hardware specifications, and safety and compliance standards for the  
CSX400, CSX400-DC, and for the individual WPIMs that can be configured with these devices.  
CSX400, CSX400-DC, andWPIM Environmental Requirements  
Table 59 Environmental Specifications  
Operating Temperature  
Storage Temperature  
Operating Humidity  
5° to 40°C (41° to 104°F)  
-30° to 73°C (-22° to 164°F)  
5% to 90% RH, non-condensing  
CSX400 Specifications and Compliance Standards  
Table 60 Hardware Specifications  
WAN Interface  
LAN Interface  
Other Interfaces  
Processor  
Width  
2 WPIM ports  
2 EPIM ports  
AC Power Connector  
Intel i960 66 Mhz  
17 inches (43.2 cm)  
1.75 inches (4.5 cm)  
13.5 inches (34.3 cm)  
5.67 lbs (2.58 kg)  
Height  
Depth  
Weight  
Power Supply  
Voltage  
Built-in power supply  
100–125 Vac ~ 1.0 A, 200–240 Vac ~ 0.5 A  
50/60 Hz  
Frequency  
Power Consumption  
100 Watts maximum  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Standards Compliance  
CSX400-DC Specifications and Compliance Standards  
Table 61 Hardware Specifications  
WAN Interface  
LAN Interface  
Other Interfaces  
Processor  
2 WPIM ports  
2 EPIM ports  
dc power terminal strip  
Intel i960 66 Mhz  
17 in (43.2 cm)  
Width  
Height  
1.75 in (4.5 cm)  
13.5 in (34.3 cm)  
5.67 lb (2.58 kg)  
Built-in power supply  
48/60 Vdc ~ 3.5 A  
100 Watts maximum  
341.2 Btu/hr  
Depth  
Weight  
Power Supply  
Voltage  
Power Consumption  
Heat Dissipation  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC Regulatory Compliance  
Safety — This unit meets the safety requirements of UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950 and  
EN 60950, IEC 950, and 73/23/EEC.  
EMC — This unit meets the EMC requirements of FCC Part 15, EN 55022, EN 50082-1,  
89/336/EEC, AS/NZS 3548, CSA C108.8, and VCCI V-3.  
CSX400-DC Regulatory Compliance (Only)  
NEBS — This unit meets a minimum of Level 1 NEBS requirements in accordance with Bellcore  
SR-3580.  
240 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Standards Compliance  
Individual WPIM Regulatory Compliance  
The following sections provide regulatory compliance standards for the WPIM-TI, WPIM-SY,  
WPIM-DDS, WPIM-E1, WPIM-DI, WPIM-S/T, and the WPIM-HDSL. Cabletron Systems  
reserves the right to change these specifications at any time without notice.  
WPIM-TI  
This section describes the environmental specifications and safety and approval requirements for  
the WPIM-T1.  
Safety — This unit meets the safety requirements of UL 1950, and CSA C22.2 No. 950.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) — This unit meets the EMC requirements of FCC Part  
15, VCCI V-3, and CSA108.8.  
NEBS — This unit meets a minimum of Level 1 NEBS requirements in accordance with Bellcore  
SR 3580.  
TELECOM — FCC Part 68, CS-03.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Standards Compliance  
WPIM-SY  
This section describes the environmental specifications and safety and approval requirements for  
the WPIM-SY.  
Safety — This unit meets the safety requirements of UL1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950, EN 60950,  
IEC 950, and 73/23/EEC.  
EMI — This unit meets the EMI requirements of FCC Part 15, EN 55022, EN 50082-1, AS/NZS  
3548, 89/336/EEC, CSA108.8, and VCCI V-3.  
TELECOM — 91/263/EEC, and NET 2.  
WPIM-DDS  
This section describes the environmental specifications and safety and approval requirements for  
the WPIM-DDS.  
Safety — This unit meets the safety requirements of UL1950, and CSA C22.2 No. 950.  
(EMC) — This unit meets the EMC requirements of FCC Part 15, CSA108.8, and VCCI V-3.  
NEBS — This unit meets a minimum of Level 1 NEBS requirements in accordance with Bellcore  
SR 3580.  
TELECOM — FCC Part 68, CS-03.  
242 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Standards Compliance  
WPIM-E1  
This section describes the environmental specifications and safety and approval requirements for  
the WPIM-E1.  
Safety — This unit meets the safety requirements of EN 60950, IEC 950, 73/23/EEC and AS/  
NZS 3260.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) — This unit meets the EMI requirements of EN 55022,  
EN 50082-1, AS/NZS 3548, and 89/336/EEC.  
TELECOM — 91/263/EEC, CTR 12, TS 001, and TS 016.  
WPIM-DI  
This section describes the environmental specifications and safety and approval requirements for  
the WPIM-DI.  
Safety — This unit meets the safety requirements of UL1950, and CSA C22.2 No. 950.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) — This unit meets the EMI requirements of FCC Part  
15, VCCI V-3, and CSA108.8.  
TELECOM — The WPIM-DI meets FCC Part 68 and CS-03.  
WPIM-S/T  
This section describes the environmental specifications and safety and approval requirements for  
the WPIM-S/T.  
Safety — This unit meets the safety requirements of UC1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950, EN 60950,  
IEC 950 73/23/EEC.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) — This unit meets the EMC requirements of FCC  
Part 15, EN 55022, VCCI V-3, CSA/08.8 EN 50082-1, AS/NZS 3548, 89/336/EEC.  
Telcom (Future) — FCC part 68, CS-03.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Standards Compliance  
WPIM-HDSL  
This section describes the environmental specifications and safety and approval requirements for  
the WPIM-HDSL.  
Safety — This unit meets the safety requirements of UC1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950, EN 60950,  
IEC 950 73/23/EEC.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) — This unit meets the EMC requirements of FCC  
Part 15, EN 55022, VCCI V-3, CSA/08.8 EN 50082-1, AS/NZS 3548, 89/336/EEC.  
NEBS — This unit meets a minimum of Level 1 NEBS requirements in accordance with Bellcore  
GR 1089.  
244 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
Network Information Worksheets  
Table 62 CSX400  
Configuration Section  
System Settings  
Item  
Setting  
Router Name  
Message  
System Settings  
Dial Authentication  
Password  
Dial Authentication  
Password/Secret  
System Settings  
ISDN SPID #1  
ISDN Settings  
ISDN SPID #2  
ISDN Directory Number #1  
ISDN Directory Number #2  
ISDN Switch Type  
System Settings  
Ethernet IP Address  
Ethernet IP Address and  
Subnet Mask  
System Settings  
Ethernet IPX Network #  
Ethernet IPX Network  
Number  
Table 63 Remote Router  
Item  
Configuration Section  
Setting  
Remote Router Database  
Dial Settings  
ISDN Phone #1 ISDN  
Phone #2 Disconnect Timer  
Value Maximum Links  
Minimum Links Threshold  
Bandwidth Direction  
Remote Router Database  
Security  
Minimum Authentication  
Remote Router’s Password/  
Secret  
Remote Router Database  
Bridging  
Bridging On/Off Spanning  
Tree On/Off  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network Information Worksheets  
Table 63 Remote Router (Continued)  
Configuration Section  
Item  
Setting  
Remote Router Database  
Remote Network’s IP  
TCP/IP Route Addresses  
Addresses, Subnet Masks,  
and Metrics Source WAN IP  
Address and Subnet Mask  
a
Remote WAN IP Address  
b
and Subnet Mask  
Remote Router Database  
IPX Routes  
IPX Routes: Network  
Number, Hop Count and  
Ticks  
Remote Router Database  
IPX SAPs  
SAPs: Server Name, Server  
Type, Network Number,  
Node Number and Sockets  
WAN Network Number  
a. Used only in PPP numbered mode of addressing  
b. Used only in PPP numbered mode of addressing  
Make one chart for each remote router in the remote router database.  
NOTE  
Table 64 Bridging and Routing Controls  
Configuration Section  
Bridging/ Routing  
Item  
Setting  
Default Remote Bridging  
Destination  
TCP/IP Routing On/Off  
Internet Firewall On/Off  
IPX Routing On/Off  
246 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
FCC Part 68 - User’s Information For CSX400  
and CSX400-DC  
The following instructions are to ensure compliance with the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules, Part 68:  
1. All connections to the WPIM-T1, WPIM-DI and WPIM-DDS must be made using standard  
plugs and jacks.  
a. The WPIM-S/T must only be connected to the network connected behind an FCC Part 68  
registered channel service unit. Direct connection is not allowed.  
2. Before connecting your unit, you must inform the local telephone company of the following  
information:  
Table 65 WPIM-DI and WPIM-T1  
Port ID  
REN/SOC  
FIC  
USOC  
04DU9-BN  
04DU9-DN  
04DU9-1KN  
04DU9-1SN  
04DU9-1ZN  
WPIM-DI  
WPIM-T1  
RJ48C  
RJ48X  
6.0N  
Table 66 WPIM-DDS (Only)  
Port ID  
REN/SOC  
FIC  
USOC  
04DU5-56  
04DU5-64  
WPIM-DDS  
6.0N  
RJ48S  
Table 67 WPIM-S/T (Only)  
Port ID  
REN/SOC  
FIC  
USOC  
(BR) WPIM-ST 6.0P  
N/A (XD)  
N/A (XD)  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC Part 68 - User’s Information For CSX400 and CSX400-DC  
3. If the unit appears to be malfunctioning, it should be disconnected from the telephone lines until  
you learn if your equipment or the telephone line is the source of the trouble. If your equipment  
needs repair, it should not be reconnected until it is repaired.  
4. The CSU/DSU has been designed to prevent harm to the T1 and DDS network. If the telephone  
company finds that the equipment is exceeding tolerable parameters, the telephone company  
can temporarily disconnect service, although they will attempt to give advance notice if  
possible.  
5. Under the FCC Rules, no customer is authorized to repair this equipment. This restriction  
applies regardless of whether the equipment is in or out of warranty.  
6. If the telephone company alters their equipment in a manner that will affect use of this device,  
they must give you advance warning so as to give you the opportunity for uninterrupted service.  
You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
7. The attached Affidavit on the following page must be completed by the installer.  
8. In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs should be performed by our Company or an  
authorized agent. It is the responsibility of the users requiring service to report the need for  
service to our Company or to one of our authorized agents. Refer to the Getting Help section  
of Chapter 1, for more information on how to get service and support.  
248  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC Part 68 - User’s Information For CSX400 and CSX400-DC  
AFFIDAVIT FOR THE CONNECTION OFCUSTOMER EQUIPMENT  
TO 1.544 MBPS AND/OR SUBRATE DIGITAL SERVICES  
For the work to be performed in the certified territory of  
Telco’s name:  
State of:  
Country of:  
I,  
, of  
(Name of Authorized Representative)  
(Customer Name)  
,
(Customer’s Address)  
(Telephone Number)  
being duly sworn, state:  
I have responsibility for the operation and maintenance of the terminal equipment to be connected  
to 1.544 Mbps and/or Subrate digital services. The  
terminal equipment to be connected complies with Part 68 of the Commission’s rules except for  
the encoded analog content and billing protection specifications. With respect to encoded analog  
content and billing protection:  
•
I attest that all operations associated with the establishment, maintenance and adjustment of  
the digital CPE with respect to encoded analog content and encoded billing information  
continuously complies with Part 68 of the FCC’s Rules and Regulations.  
•
•
The digital CPE does not transmit digital signals containing encoded analog or billing  
information which is intended to be decoded within the telecommunications network.  
The encoded analog and billing protection is factory set and is not under the control of the  
customer.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC Part 68 - User’s Information For CSX400 and CSX400-DC  
I attest that the operator(s) maintainer(s) of the digital CPE responsible for the establishment,  
maintenance and adjustment of the encoded analog content and billing information has (have)  
been trained to perform these functions by successfully completing one of the following: Check  
appropriate one(s).  
a. A training course provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode  
analog signals; or  
b. A training course provided by the customer or authorized representative, using training  
materials and instructions provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to  
encode analog signals; or  
c. An independent training course (e.g. trade school or technical institution) recognized by the  
manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or  
d. In lieu of the proceeding training requirements, the operator(s) maintainer(s) is (are) under  
the control of a supervisor trained in accordance with  
above.  
I agree to provide with proper documentation  
(Telco’s Name)  
to demonstrate compliance with the information as provided in the proceeding paragraph, if so  
requested.  
(Signature)  
(Title)  
(Date)  
Subscribed and sworn to me this  
day of  
, 19  
.
(Notary Public)  
My commission expires:  
250  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F
Glossary  
10BASE-T — IEEE 802.3 standard for the use of Ethernet LAN technology over Unshielded  
Twisted Pair wiring, running at 10 Mbps.  
ARP — Address Resolution Protocol. An Internet protocol used to bind an IP address to Ethernet/  
802.3 addresses.  
ASCII — American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It is an 8-bit code for character  
representation.  
AUI — Attachment Unit Interface. An IEEE 802.3 transceiver cable connecting the network  
device (such as a router) to the MAU (media access unit).  
Bandwidth on Demand — Feature providing the capability of adjusting the bandwidth (opening  
or closing multiple B channels) when the load in traffic increases or decreases.  
Bridge — A device that segments network traffic. A bridge maintains a list of each node on the  
segment and only traffic destined for a node on the adjacent segment is passed across the bridge. A  
bridge operates at Layer 2 of the OSI reference model.  
Bearer (B) Channel — A full duplex ISDN BRI or PRI 64 Kbps channel used for sending user  
data.  
BRI — Basic Rate Interface. The ISDN interface providing two 64 Kbps B channels for voice,  
data and video transmission and one 16 Kbps D channel for signaling and data transmission.  
CHAP — Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. A security protocol supported under  
point-to-point protocol (PPP) used to prevent unauthorized access to devices and remote networks.  
Uses encryption of password, device names and random number generation.  
DCE — Data Communications Equipment. Equipment used within a network to transfer data  
from source to destination such as modems.  
D Channel — In ISDN, a full-duplex 16 Kbps channel used for link setup.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Data Compression — Techniques used to reduce the number of bits transferred across the  
communication links that represent the actual data bits. Compression is used to optimize use of  
WAN links and speed data transmission.  
DHCP — Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a protocol for automatic TCP/IP configuration  
that provides static and dynamic address allocation and management.  
Dial on Demand — Dial up WAN resources are accessed only when remote access is required  
and released as soon as the resource is no longer needed.  
DTE — Data Terminating Equipment. DTE refers to equipment used in a network as the data  
source and/or destination, such as computers.  
DTMF — Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. TOUCHTONE as opposed to Dial Pulse (DP).  
DTR — Data Terminal Ready. RS232 signal used for indicating to the DCE the readiness to  
transmit and receive data.  
EtherTalk — AppleTalk protocols running on Ethernet.  
Filter — Feature to control the flow of data based on protocol or bridge information. Filters can  
be specific to allow data through or prevent transmission.  
Firewall — A combination of techniques used to protect one network from unknown networks  
and users on the outside. Firewalls can filter or block traffic and act as a management and network  
security point where all traffic can be scrutinized.  
Frame — A group of data generated by Data Link Layer operation.  
HDSL — High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line. A technology to put two-way T1 on a normal  
unshielded, bridged (but not loaded) twisted pair without using repeaters.  
IMUX (Inverse Multiplexing) — The process of splitting a single high-speed channel into  
multiple signals, transmitting the multiple signals over multiple facilities operating at a lower rate  
than the original signal, and then recombining the separately-transmitted portions into the original  
signal at the original rate.  
In-Band Signaling — Transmission within the frequency range used for data transmission; i.e.,  
results in use of bandwidth normally reserved for data.  
252 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
IP — Internet protocol. A network layer protocol which allows a packet to traverse multiple  
networks on the way to its final destination.  
IP Address — Internet address. A 32-bit address assigned to devices that participate in a network  
using TCP/IP. An IP address consists of four octets separated with periods defining network,  
optional subnet and host sections.  
IPX (Internet Packet Exchange) — A proprietary Network layer protocol developed by Novell  
and used in NetWare networks.  
ISDN — Integrated Services Digital Network. Digital transmission standard defining  
communication protocols permitting telephone networks to carry data, voice, fax and other  
streams.  
Leased Line — A telecommunications line between two service points leased from a  
communications carrier for private use, usually incurring a monthly service rate.  
LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) — Type of indicator lights on the panel of a device.  
Local Area Network (LAN) — A network connecting computers over a relatively small  
geographic area (usually within a single campus or building).  
MAC Layer/Address — Media Access Control layer/address defined by the IEEE 802.3  
specification which defines media access including framing and error detection. Part of the OSI  
reference model Data Link layer.  
Metric — An algorithm used by routers to determine the best path for transmitting packets to a  
remote destination based on considerations such as time, delay, cost, etc.  
Modem — Modulator/Demodulator. A device that converts digital signals to/from analog signals  
for transmission over analog communications lines.  
Multi-Link Protocol — A protocol, defined in RFC 1717, that defines a way to perform inverse  
multiplexing on the TCP/IP point-to-point protocol (PPP); i.e., the ability to use multiple serial  
WAN channels for transferring one datastream. With MLP, a user can send and receive data over  
both B channels in an ISDN basic-rate interface connection  
NAT — Network Address Translation uses a unique IP address for a WAN interface. This IP  
Address is negotiated through PPP or assigned statically by the Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
NAT reduces the number of unique IP addresses for all clients using a particular WAN interface to  
one.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
NetWare — A Network Operating System developed by Novell, Inc. providing shared access to  
files and other network services.  
Network Layer — Layer 3 of the OSI reference model that provides the protocol routing  
function.  
Node — Refers to a termination point for communication links; entity that can access a network.  
OSI — Open System Interconnection. An international standard developed by ITU (formally  
CCITT) and ISO (International Organization for Standardization) to facilitate data networking  
multi-vendor interoperability. The OSI Reference Model defines seven layers, each providing  
specific network functions.  
Packet — A group of data that includes a header and usually user data for transmission through a  
network.  
Ping (Packet Internet Groper) — An echo message, available within the TCP/IP protocol suite,  
sent to a remote node and returned; used to test the accessibility of the remote node.  
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) — A Data Link layer protocol that provides asynchronous and  
synchronous connectivity between computer/network nodes. Includes standardization for security  
and compression negotiation.  
Q.921 — ISDN Data Link layer specification for the user-to-network interface.  
Q.931 — ISDN specification for call set-up and signaling on ISDN connections.  
RFC — Request for Comment. Documentation describing Internet communications  
specifications (e.g., Telnet, TFTP). Often these RFCs are used to achieve multi-vendor  
interoperability during implementation.  
RJ11 — Standard 4-wire connectors for telephone lines.  
RJ45 — Standard 8-wire connectors used for ISDN lines and 10 BASE-T connections.  
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) — Protocols used in IP and IPX for broadcasting open path  
information between routers to keep routing tables current.  
Routing — A Network layer function that determines the path for transmitting packets through a  
network from source to destination.  
254 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
RS-232 — EIA standard specifying the physical layer interface used to connect a device to  
communications media.  
Serialization Frames — Frames sent out by servers under IPX to check whether illegal copies of  
NetWare are in use on the network.  
Service Advertising Protocol — Protocol used in IPX for broadcasting information about  
services available on the network, such as file servers, CD-ROM drives and modem pools.  
SNMP — Simple Network Management Protocol. A widely implemented Internet network  
management protocol that allows status monitoring, getting/setting of parameters for configuration  
and control of network devices, such as routers and bridges.  
Split B Channels — Each 64 Kbps ISDN B-channel can be used individually for a separate data  
connection.  
Spoofing — Spoofing is a technique used to remove poll and update service frames from WAN  
links while ensuring that the network continues to operate normally. Spoofing is employed to  
minimize dial-up line connection time.  
Subnet Address — An extension of the Internet 32-bit addressing scheme that allows the  
separation of physical or logical networks within the single network number assigned to an  
organization. TCP/IP entities outside this organization have no knowledge of the internal  
“subnetting.”  
Subnet Mask — A 32-bit internet protocol address mask used to identify a particular  
subnetwork.  
TCP/IP — Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Refers to a set of internetworking  
protocols developed by the U.S. Department of Defense that define a two level layered approach  
for interoperability. TCP provides a connection-oriented Transport layer ensuring end-to-end  
reliability in data transmission. IP provides for Network layer connectivity using connectionless  
datagrams.  
Telco Cloud — The “cloud” of switched virtual connections over a Wide Area Network (WAN).  
TELNET — Internet standard protocol for remote terminal emulation that allows a user to  
remotely log in to another device and appear as if directly connected.  
TFTP — Trivial File Transfer Protocol. A simplified version of the File Transfer Protocol (FTP)  
allowing for file transfer between computers over a network.  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Transparent Bridging — Bridging technique used in Ethernet networks that allows transfer of  
frames across intermediate nodes using tables associating end nodes with bridging addresses.  
Bridges are unknown to the end nodes.  
UDP — User Datagram Protocol. A connectionless protocol used to pass packets across an  
internet network, requiring no handshaking between source and destination.  
Watchdog Frames — Frames sent out by servers to clients, under IPX, to verify that clients are  
still logged on.  
Wide Area Network — A communications network that is geographically dispersed thus  
requiring links provided by communications carriers.  
Workstation — Computer or terminal used by the systems administration or user.  
256 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Bridging 16  
Bridging and routing 17  
Broadcast 160  
Numerics  
10BASE2  
grounding 53  
link length 53  
specifications 53  
10BASE-F  
C
Cable requirements 49  
CHAP 12  
attenuation  
multimode 51  
single mode 52  
link length  
Coaxial cable - see 10BASE2  
Configuring the Network Broadcast Type on a  
port 160  
multimode 52  
single mode 53  
specifications 51  
10BASE-T  
Configuring the UDP Broadcast Redirector 158  
Crosstalk 50  
CSX-COMP/ENCR installation 62  
impedance 50  
insertion loss 50  
link length 50  
specifications 50  
D
Daughter Board 8  
DC Power Supply Connections 70  
Default Gateway 137, 139  
Default Interface 137, 140  
Directory numbers 25  
DMS-100 switch parameters 28  
Domain Name Server 158  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
(DHCP) 11  
A
AT & T 5ESS switch parameters 27  
Attenuation  
10BASE-F  
multimode 51  
single mode 52  
10BASE-T 51  
E
EMC 241, 242, 243  
EMI 242, 243  
B
Bootstrap Protocol Client 158  
Bootstrap Protocol Server 158  
BRI configurations 25  
Bridge filtering 18  
Enabling Forwarding on a port  
IP 157, 166  
Enabling Proxy ARP on a port 159  
Enabling Routing Services on a port  
IP 157, 166  
Bridge Setup  
bridge port pair administrative status 151  
port administrative status 150  
spanning tree protocol 149  
Enabling the RIP Routing Protocol on a  
port 160, 170  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
IP/IPX QuickSET routing  
configuration 107 to 110  
IPX  
F
Fiber optics - see 10BASE-F  
Firmware Data Compression 10  
Flash Download  
about IPX routing 17  
enabling forwarding on a port 166  
enabling RIP on a port 170  
enabling routing services on a port 166  
enabling SAP on a port 168  
QuickSET IPX configuration 100  
bootprom 146, 147  
runtime 147  
Flash EEPROMs 7  
G
ISDN 14  
arranging service 23  
Getting help 4  
Grounding  
10BASE2 53  
BRI line configuration 24  
types of switches 24  
H
K
Hardware specs 239, 240  
Host IP Address 136, 139  
Host Name Server 158  
Keyboard conventions 129  
L
LAN support 7  
I
Link length  
IEEE 802.1d bridging 17  
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 8  
Impedance  
10BASE2 53  
10BASE-F  
multimode 52  
single mode 53  
10BASE-T 50  
10BASE-T 50  
Insertion loss  
10BASE-T 50  
Local Management  
exiting screens 130  
navigating menu screens 133  
selecting menu screen items 132  
Local Management Screen Fields  
command fields 128  
display fields 128  
event message field 128  
input fields 128  
Inverse Multiplexing (IMUX) 10, 100  
IP  
about IP routing 17  
Configuring the Network Broadcast Type on a  
port 160  
Configuring the UDP Broadcast  
Redirector 158  
Enabling Forwarding on a port 157, 166  
Enabling Proxy ARP on a port 159  
Enabling Routing Services on a port 157  
Enabling the RIP Routing Protocol on a  
port 160, 170  
selection fields 128  
internet firewall 18  
Secondary IPs 76  
Selecting a port for configuration 156, 164  
258 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
M
R
Management Agent 126  
MIB  
Rack Mounting  
accessory kit 8  
description 178  
tree hierarchy 179  
MIB Navigator  
Remote Network Management 7  
Remote router worksheet 245  
RIP 160, 170  
exiting 177, 180  
navigation commands 179  
other commands 180  
special commands 180  
MIB support 19  
Router configuration 29  
directory numbers 31  
IPX network numbers 37  
IPX routes 37  
IPX routing 36  
IPX SAPs 37  
ISDN line information 31  
names and passwords 47  
network diagrams 32  
network information 30  
network information tables 38  
node numbers 38  
N
National ISDN 1 26  
NETBIOS  
Datagram Server 158  
Name Server 158  
Network Address Translator (NAT) 11  
Network information worksheets 223, 245  
Network Management  
local 126  
phone numbers 31  
sample configuration 42  
source and remote IP addresses 33  
SPIDs 31  
TCP/IP default route 33  
TCP/IP route addresses 33  
TCP/IP routing 32  
remote 126  
NT-1 parameters 26  
P
PAP 12  
Routing 17  
Phone numbers 25  
Phys Address 137  
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) 12  
PPP 8, 9  
Propagation delay 50, 52  
Proxy ARP 159  
CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
T
S
TACACS-Database Service 158  
T-connectors 53  
Telephone switch parameters 26  
Telnet 131  
Safety Requirements 242  
Selecting a port for configuration  
IP 156, 164  
SNMP 19  
Time 158  
SNMP Community Names  
read-only 18, 78, 142  
read-write 19, 78, 142  
super-user 19, 78, 142  
SNMP Traps  
Trivial File Transfer 158  
Troubleshooting 205  
bridging 215  
power 208  
software 214  
enable traps 144  
TCP/IP routing 215  
trap community name 143  
trap destination 143  
Software and firmware upgrades 22  
SPIDs 25, 26  
Subnet Mask 137, 139  
Sunrpc (NIS) 158  
U
UDP  
Bootstrap Protocol Client 158  
Bootstrap Protocol Server 158  
Configuring the Broadcast Redirector 158  
Domain Name Server 158  
Host Name Server 158  
NETBIOS Datagram Server 158  
NETBIOS Name Server 158  
port numbers and requested services 158  
Sunrpc (NIS) 158  
Switch support 14  
Switches  
AT&T 5ESS w/custom software 24  
DMS-100 24  
French Delta (VN4) switches 24  
KDD (Kokusai Denshin Denwa Co., Ltd.) 24  
National ISDN 1 (NI-1) 24  
NET3 (European ISDN) 24  
NET3SW (European Swiss-variant) 24  
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone) 24  
System Date 136, 138  
System Time 136, 138  
TACACS-Database Service 158  
Time 158  
Trivial File Transfer 158  
W
Wire size 25  
Worksheets (network info) 223, 245  
WPIMs  
WPIM-DDS 91 to 95  
WPIM-DI 85 to 87  
WPIM-E1 83 to 85  
WPIM-SYNC 88 to 90  
WPIM-T1 83, 85, 88  
260 CSX400 and CSX400-DC User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POWER SUPPLY CORD  
The mains cord used with this equipment must be a 2 conductor plus ground type  
with minimum 0.75 mm square conductors and must incorporate a standard IEC  
appliance coupler on one end and a mains plug on the other end which is suitable  
for the use and application of the product and that is approved for use in the  
country of application.  
GERMAN:  
Die Netzleitung, die mit diesem Geraet benuetzt wird, soll einen zwei Leiter mit  
Erdleiter haben, wobei die Leiter mindestens 0.75 mm sind, mit einer normalen  
IEC Geraetesteckdose an einem Ende und einem Geraetestecker am anderen Ende  
versehen sind, der fuer den Gebrauch und die Anwendung des Geraetes geeignet  
und der zum Benuetzen im Lande der Anwendung anerkannt ist.  
SPANISH:  
El cable principal de la red eléctrica utilizado con este equipo debe tener 2  
conductores y 1 toma de tierra con un mínimo de 0.75 mm2 cada uno y necesita  
tener un aparato de acoplamiento standard IEC en un extremo y un enchufe para  
el cable principal de la red eléctrica en el otro extremo, lo cual sea adecuado para  
el uso y applicación del producto y lo cual sea aprobado para uso en el pais de  
applicación.  
FRENCH:  
Le cordon d' alimentation reliant cet appareil au secteur doit obligatoirement avoir  
deux fils conducteurs de 0.75 mm2 minimum et un fil de terre. It doit également  
être équipé du côté appareil d'une fiche agrée IEC et du côte secteur, d'une prise  
adaptée à l'usage du produit et aux normes du pays où l'appareil est utilisé.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Billy Goat Vacuum Cleaner KD 50, KD 50C, KD 50T, KD 50CT, KD 55CKW User Manual
Blackberry Cell Phone VERSION 1012 User Manual
Black Decker Carpet Cleaner S700E User Manual
Bloomfield Coffeemaker 9102A User Manual
Broan Ventilation Hood QTR100 User Manual
Brother Label Maker QL 700 User Manual
Canon Camera Lens 2537A003 User Manual
Capcom Video Games 13388340231 User Manual
Chauvet All in One Printer 560Z LED User Manual
Chromalox Electric Heater PTHT 101 User Manual